Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 Marshalltown Community School ... · 8/30/2019 · Support Services Center, Admin. Conference Room 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 ... 00 01 05

Volume 1 of 1For

MCSD Security Management SystemPhase 3

Marshalltown Community School DistrictMarshalltown, Iowa 50158

TSP Project #06-190256.00

Pre-Bid Conf.: Thursday, September 26, 2019 – 3:30 pmStarting at Franklin Elem. School

Receipt of Bids: Thursday, October 3, 2019 – 2:00 p.m.Consideration of Bids: Monday, October 7, 2019 – 5:00 p.m.

Overall Substantial Completion: Friday, February 14, 2019, 5:00 p.m.

Substantial Completion Date: Friday, August 15, 2014

DIVISION 00 - INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

TSP, Inc. © 00 01 01 - 1/2 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

DOCUMENT 00 01 01TITLE SHEET

Security Management System – Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District

Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

OWNER: Marshalltown Community School District1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, IA 50158Telephone: 641-754-1000, Fax: 641-754-1003Contact Persons:

Chuck Springer, Facilities DirectorEmail: [email protected] Joshua Wesley, Technology DirectorEmail: [email protected]

ARCHITECTURAL: TSP, Inc.P.O Box 1534., Marshalltown, Iowa 501581112 N. West Ave., Sioux Falls, SD 57104Phone: 641-752-3930 Contact Persons:

Justin W Sorensen, AIAE-Mail: [email protected]

MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: TSP, Inc.1112 N. West Ave., Sioux Falls, SD 57104Phone: 605-336-1160 / Fax: Contacts: Darrell Bren PE (Electrical)

E-Mail: [email protected]: Jacod Buckmiller, EIT (Electrical)

E-Mail: [email protected]

PUBLIC HEARING: Monday, September 3, 2019 – 5:00 p.m.Marshalltown Community School DistrictSupport Services Center, Board Room1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

PRE-BID CONFERENCE: Thursday, September 26, 2019 at 3:30 p.m.Franklin Elementary School1315 W. Main Street, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

RECEIPT OF BIDS: Thursday, October 3, 2019 at 2:00 pmMarshalltown Community School DistrictSupport Services Center, Admin. Conference Room1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: Monday, October 7, 2019 at 5:00 pmMarshalltown Community School DistrictSupport Services Center, Board Room1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: Friday, February 14, 2019 – 5:00 p.m.

END OF SECTION 00 01 01

mailto:[email protected]






DOCUMENT 00 01 01TITLE SHEET


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


TSP, Inc. © 00 01 05 - 1/2 06-190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

DOCUMENT 00 01 05ARCHITECT / ENGINEER CERTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION:

I hereby certify that within this Project Manual, General Specifications including Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, Specifications - Divisions 1 through 14 with the exception of Division 5 Sections called out in Structural Certification below were prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision, and that I am a Licensed Architect under the laws of the state of Iowa.

06395 June 30, 2021 Justin W Sorensen Date. Reg. No. Renewal DateArchitect – TSP, Inc.

C. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER CERTIFICATION:

I hereby certify that within this Project Manual, Specifications - Division 26 thru 28 were prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision, and that I am a Licensed Engineer under the laws of the state of Iowa.

15317 December 31, 2019 Darrell Bren, P.E. Date. Reg. No. Renewal DateElectrical Engineer – TSP, Inc.


DOCUMENT 00 01 05ARCHITECT / ENGINEER CERTIFICATION

TSP, Inc. © 00 01 05 - 2/2 06-190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

PART 3 - EXECUTION:



TSP, Inc. © 00 01 10 - 1/4 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SET 09/04/2019

DOCUMENT 00 01 10TABLE OF CONTENTS

“Exhibit “A”

PART 1 - GENERAL

ALL CONTRACTORS NOTE: This project uses the 2004 Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) and MasterSpec Numbering System.

VOLUME 1 – Divisions 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, & 31, 32, 33 Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION00 00 00 Cover – Volume 1 of 100 01 01 Title Sheet00 01 05 Architect / Engineer Certification00 01 10 Table of Contents00 01 15 List of Drawings

BIDDING / NOTICES / REQUIREMENTS00 11 00 Notice of Public Hearing00 11 13 Notice of Letting 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders - AIA Document A701 with Modifications & Additions00 22 13 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders00 23 19 Location of Drawings & Project Manuals for Review00 25 13 Pre-Bid Conference00 26 00 Procurement Substitution Procedures00 31 19 Existing Conditions00 31 19.01 Existing Conditions Photographs00 31 21 Information Available to Bidders

BID DOCUMENTS00 41 13 Bid Form – Stipulated Sum (Single Prime Contract)00 43 13 Bid Security Forms - AIA Document A310

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENT / FORMS00 51 00 Notice of Award 00 52 13 Agreement Forms – Single Prime Contract

AIA Document A101 with Modifications & Additions00 55 00 Notice to Proceed00 60 00 Project Forms00 61 00 Project Bonds & Insurance AIA Document A31200 65 83 Contractor Certificates - Hazardous Materials Exclusion Certificate

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT00 72 13 General Conditions - AIA Document A201 with Modifications & Additions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions00 91 13 Addenda



Exhibit “A”


SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01 11 00 Summary of Project (Single Prime Contract)01 21 00 Allowances01 22 00 Measurement and Payment (Unit Prices)01 23 00 Alternates01 25 00 Substitution Procedures01 25 13 Request for Material & Equipment Substitution01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures01 29 90 Sub-Schedule of Stored Materials Value01 33 00 Submittal Procedures01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 45 00 Quality Requirements & Testing and Inspecting Services01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls01 60 00 Product Requirements (Materials and Equipment)01 73 29 Cutting and Patching01 75 00 Facility Start-Up / Commissioning01 77 00 Closeout Procedures01 78 23 Operation & Maintenance Data (Warranties and Bonds)01 78 39 Project Record Documents01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS02 41 19 Selective Demolition for Remodeling

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE – N/A

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY – N/A

DIVISION 05 – METALS – N/A

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS08 71 00 Door Hardware08 71 13 Automatic Door Openers

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES09 91 13 Exterior Painting09 91 23 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES – N/ADIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – N/ADIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – N/ADIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – N/A



Exhibit “A”


DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION – N/ADIVISION 22 – PLUMBING – N/ADIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) – N/ADIVISION 25 – INTEGRATION AUTOMATION – N/A

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL26 00 00 Common Work Results for Electrical26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY28 33 00 Security Management System and Devices

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK – N/ADIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS – N/ADIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – N/ADIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION – N/ADIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION – N/ADIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION – N/ADIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 42 – PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT– N/ADIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE

EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 45 – INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 48 – ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION – N/A

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used




Exhibit “A”



INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION


DOCUMENT 00 01 15LIST OF DRAWINGS

Exhibit “B”

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

Note: All Drawings are in 24” x 36” Format and bound independently of this Project Manual

GENERAL DRAWINGS:

G-001 Cover Sheet, Certifications, Index of Drawings, Vicinity Map, Abbreviations, Symbols Legend, Material Legend

G-101 Details, Schedules, & Notes

CIVIL DRAWINGS: NONE

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: NONE

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS: (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS BELOW)

INTERIOR DRAWINGS: NONE

LIFE SAFETY DRAWINGS: NONE

MECHANCIAL DRAWINGS: NONE

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS:

E-001 Electrical Symbols, Abbreviations, and General Notes

AE101 Anson Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanAE102 Anson Elementary School – Second Level Floor PlanAE103 Anson Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video Surveillance

Schedules

FI001 Fisher Elementary School – General Building Notes and KeynotesFI101 Fisher Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanFI102 Fisher Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video Surveillance

Schedules

FR101 Franklin Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanFR102 Franklin Elementary School – Second Level Floor PlanFR103 Franklin Elementary School – Third Level Floor PlanFR104 Franklin Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video

Surveillance Schedules

HO001 Hoglan Elementary School – General Building Notes and Keynotes HO101 Hoglan Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanHO102 Hoglan Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video


INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

SECTION 00 01 15LIST OF DRAWINGS

Exhibit “B”


RO101 Rogers Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanRO102 Rogers Elementary School – Second Level Floor PlanRO103 Rogers Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video


WO101 Woodbury Elementary School – First Level Floor PlanWO102 Woodbury Elementary School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video

Surveillance Schedules LIS001 Lenihan Intermediate School – General Building Notes and KeynotesLIS100 Lenihan Intermediate School – Site PlanLIS101 Lenihan Intermediate School – First Level Floor Plan LIS102 Lenihan Intermediate School – Second Level Floor PlanLIS103 Lenihan Intermediate School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video


MMS001 Miller Middle School – General Building Notes and KeynotesMMS100 Miller Middle School – Lower Level Floor PlanMMS101 Miller Middle School – First Level Floor Plan MMS102 Miller Middle School – Architectural / Electrical Upper Level Floor Plan

MHS001 Marshalltown High School – General Building Notes and KeynotesMHS101 Marshalltown High School – First Level Floor Plan MHS102 Marshalltown High School – Second Level Floor PlanMHS103 Marshalltown High School – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video


SSC100 Support Service / MLA – General Building Notes and KeynotesSSC101 Support Service / MLA – Lower Level Floor PlanSSC102 Support Service / MLA – First Level Floor PlanSSC03 Support Service / MLA – Second Level Floor PlanSSC103 Support Service / MLA – Third Level Floor PlanSSC104 Support Service / MLA – Door Hardware, Access Control, and Video


PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED


BIDDING / NOTICES / REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT 00 11 00NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING

TSP, Inc. © 00 11 00 - 1/1 06-190256.00DDS - 08/20/2019

Project: MCSD Security Management System (SMS) Phase 3 Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

TSP C/N: 06-190256.00

Architect: TSP, Inc.P.O Box 1534Marshalltown, IA 50158Phone: 641-752-3930E-mail: [email protected]

Public Hearing:The Board of Education of the Marshalltown Community School District will conduct a public hearing in the District’s Support Service Center Board Room, Marshalltown Community School District, 1002 S. 3rd Ave.,, Marshalltown, Iowa at 5:00 P.M on the 3rd day of September, 2019 at which place and time any person interested may appear and file objections to the proposed plans, specification form of contract and estimated total of the Marshalltown Community School District Security Management System Phase 3 Project.

Project Description:The Project, which is located at Marshalltown Iowa, involves the construction activities as required by the Contract Documents, which shall include:

Equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules, and additional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System. This work to be under Base Bid for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rogers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School, and Support Services Center / MLA.

Alternates will include additional Access Controls at Lenihan Intermediate School, Miller Middle School and Marshalltown High School and additional Video Surveillance at the Elementary Schools, Lenihan Intermediate School and the Support Services Center / MLA Building.

Location & Availability of Review Documents:

Bidding Documents may be examined at the Superintendent's Office located at 1002 S. 3rd Ave. beginning on August 28, 2019, and may be inspected by all interested parties. All interested parties are invited to attend and speak at the public hearing. Following the public hearing the Board may take action to approve the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost of the Project.

Published upon order of the Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa.

Signed: Board President

Printed Name Title

Signature Date

Attest: Board Secretary

Printed Name Title

Signature Date



DOCUMENT 00 11 13NOTICE OF LETTING

TSP, Inc. © 00 11 13 - 1/3 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

Project: Marshalltown Community School District Security Management System (SMS) Phase 3 Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

TSP C/N: 06-190256.00

Architect: TSP, Inc.P.O Box 1534Marshalltown, IA 50158Phone: 641-752-3930E-mail: [email protected]

Public Hearing: A Public Hearing will be conducted at a meeting of the Marshalltown Community School District Board at the MCSD Administration Building Board Room, 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa, at 5:00 p.m. on Tuesday, September 3, 2019.

Receipt of BidsTime & Place: Sealed Bids for the Project(s) will be received by the Owner’s designated representative of the

Marshalltown Community School District Board at the MCSD Support Services Center Conference Room, 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa, at 2:00 p.m. on Thursday, October 3, 2019, at which time they will be opened and the results thereof publicly announced. Bids received after that time will not be considered.

Project Description: The Project generally consists of equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules, and ad-ditional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System. This work to be under Base Bid for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rog-ers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School, and Support Services Center / MLA.

Alternates will include additional Access Controls at Lenihan Intermediate School, Miller Middle School and Marshalltown High School and additional Video Surveillance at the Elementary Schools, Lenihan Intermediate School and the Support Services Center / MLA Building.

Construction Cost: Construction Cost for the Project is anticipated to be approximately $500,000.00

Consideration of Bids:Previously opened bids will be considered at a meeting of the Marshalltown Community School Board at the MCSD Administration Building Board Room, 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa, at 5:00 p.m. on Monday, October 7, 2019.

Pre-Bid ConferenceSite Visit: A Pre-Bid meeting is scheduled at the Project site(s) for 3:30 P.M. on Thursday, September 26,

2016, beginning at Franklin Elementary School at 1315 West Main Street, Marshalltown, Iowa.

Completion Date: The project will commence upon Notice to Proceed as soon as award of bid and processing of contracts will allow on or about October 14, 2019. On site construction is anticipated to begin on or about October 28, 2019. Scheduled Substantial Completion for Base Bid is January 17, 2020 with a final completion date of February 14, 2020.

Form of Contract,Bid Forms & Bid Security:

The Work considered shall be competitive, Single Prime Contract for a Lump Sum Amount. All Bids shall be made on official Proposal Forms furnished by the Architect and must be enclosed in a separate envelope plainly identified with Project Name and addressed to The Marshalltown Community School Board, 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158. Each Proposal shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier’s Check or Certified Credit Union Share Draft in a separate sealed envelope in the amount equal to five percent (5%) of the total amount of the Bid. If Bid Bond is submitted, it must be on the form identified within the Contract Documents. The Certified Check or Cashier’s Check or Certified Share Draft shall be drawn on a bank or credit union in Iowa or a bank or credit union chartered under the laws of the United




TSP, Inc. © 00 11 13 - 2/3 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

States of America, and payable to the Marshalltown Community School District as security that if awarded a Contract by resolution of the Board, the Bidder will enter into a Contract at the price of Bid and furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds and Certificate of Insurance. The Certified Check, Cashier’s Check or Certified Share Draft may be cashed, or the Bid Bond forfeited, and the proceeds retained as penalty if the Bidder fails to execute a Contract or file acceptable Performance and Payment Bond(s) and provide an acceptable Certificate of Insurance, within ten (10) days after notice of acceptance of his Bid by resolution of the Board. Provide blanks on envelopes for signature and time and date stamp per statutory requirements.

Additional Building Requirements: An out-of-state Bidder, if awarded a Contract, will be required to submit evidence of authorization

to do business in the State of Iowa. An unincorporated out-of-state Contractor will be required to furnish evidence of State Department of Revenue’s receipt of Bond guaranteeing payment of State income taxes on profit from Project, for each year during construction.

Performance Bond,Labor & Material: The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a corporate surety Performance Bond and

Labor & Materials Payment Bond in an amount equal to one hundred per cent (100%) of the total Contract Price. Said Bond shall be issued by a responsible surety approved by the Board and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the Contract and the terms and conditions therein contained and the maintenance of said improvements in good repair for not less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance of said improvements by the Board.

Iowa State Sales Tax:The Owner is an exempt entity, therefore the Project shall be exempt from Iowa State Sales Tax pursuant to Iowa Code Sections 423.3(31a) and 423.3(80). The Owner will provide additional documentation to the successful contractor subsequent to award of the contract.

Award of Contract: Time Period: All Bidders shall honor their Bids as submitted for a period of 30 days from date of receipt of Bids.Basis of Award: The Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder on the basis of Base Bid plus any combination of Alternates, either separately or in combination, which is in the best interest of the Owner provided the amount is within the funds available. By virtue of statutory authority a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and/or produced within the State of Iowa and to Iowa domestic labor.

All bidders must provide a statement regarding the bidder’s resident status. This statement shall be on the Bidder Status Form designated by the Iowa Department of Labor commissioner and available online. The statement must be signed by an authorized representative of the bidder. Failure by any bidder to provide a completed statement with its bid may result in the Board of Education rejecting the bid as non-responsive.

In accordance with Iowa statutes, a resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.

The Owner reserves the right to review, approve or reject any sub-bidder, subcontractor or supplier identified by the Prime Contractor. If changes are required by the Owner, appropriate adjustments in the Contract amount will be made.

The right is reserved to reject any and all bids, or any part thereof, and to waive informalities or irregularities as allowed by law and to enter into such Contract or Contracts as shall be deemed in



TSP, Inc. © 00 11 13 - 3/3 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

the best interests of the Marshalltown Community School District.

Location & Availability of Bidding Documents:

Bidding Documents may be obtained from Action Reprographics www.actionrepro.com upon receipt of $100.00 refundable deposit. Shipping / distribution charges will be established by Action Reprographics at the cost of the bidder, payable to Action Reprographics. Plan deposits will be refunded upon the return of the documents, in reusable condition to Action Reprographics within 14 days after the award of the project. Failure to comply will result in the forfeiture of the plan deposit.

Bidding Documents are also on file with the Owner, at the Project Site and at the Architect’s Office. Additionally, Bidding Documents are located at several plan centers as identified in Document 00 23 00 within the Project Manual and may be inquired of the Architect.

All Bidders & Sub-bidders shall be registered with the Architect’s publishing agent, Action Reprographics, to receive project updates and addenda. Bidding documents may be viewed at Action Reprographics’s website www.actionrepro.com.

Questions, Clarifications & Addenda: Questions and clarifications shall be directed to the Architect as identified above.

Significant questions, clarifications, changes or additional information will be issued by the Architect in the form of Addenda to all plan holders of record and plan centers.

All bids will be governed by applicable provisions in the Iowa Code and Board Policies.

Published upon order of the Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa.

Signed:

Board PresidentPrinted Name Title

Signature Date

Attest:

Board SecretaryPrinted Name Title

Signature Date

http://www.actionrepro.com/


DIVISION 00 - BIDDING / NOTICES / REQUIREMENTS

TSP, Inc. © 00 21 13 - 1/2 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS BID SET 09/04/2019

DOCUMENT 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Instructions to Bidders – AIA Document A701 - 1997 Instructions to Bidders

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

A. The AIA Document A701-1997 “Instructions to Bidders” 1997 Edition, is not bound within this Project Manual but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs, the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. Instructions to Bidders as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers.

1.3 TO OBTAIN REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:

A. Referenced documents are copyrighted by the American Institute of Architects. Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers shall obtain and pay for original documents.

B. Copies of these documents may be viewed or obtained at cost of providing same as follows:

1. American Institute of Architects Iowa Chapter Office 400 Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, Iowa 50309Telephone: 515-244-7502 / Fax: 515-24-5347Email: [email protected] Website: www.aiaiowa.org

2. TSP, Inc.P.O. Box 1534, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158-5519Telephone: 641-752-3930 / Fax: 641-752-4797Email: [email protected] Website: www.teamtsp.com

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Document 00 11 00 “Notice of Public Hearing”B. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”C. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”D. Document 00 23 19 “Location of Drawings and Project Manuals for Review”E. Document 00 25 13 “Pre-Bid Conference”F. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”G. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”H. Section 00 91 13 “Addenda”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION



http://www.aiaiowa.org/


http://www.teamtsp.com/


DOCUMENT 00 21 13SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS





DOCUMENT 00 22 13 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Instructions to Bidders – AIA Document A701 - 1997 Instructions to BiddersB. Modifications to the referenced Instructions to BiddersC. Supplemental paragraphs to the referenced Instructions to BiddersD. Deletions to the referenced Instructions to Bidders

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A701-1997 “Instructions to Bidders” 1997 Edition, is not bound within

this Project Manual but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs, the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. Instructions to Bidders as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers.

1.3 TO OBTAIN REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:A. Referenced documents are copyrighted by the American Institute of Architects. Contractors,

Subcontractors and Suppliers shall obtain and pay for original documents.B. Copies of these documents may be viewed or obtained at cost of providing same as follows:


2. TSP, Inc.306 South 17th Avenue, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158-5519Telephone: 641-752-3930 / Fax: 641-752-4797Email: [email protected] Website: www.teamtsp.com

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 11 00 “Notice of Public Hearing”B. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”C. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”D. Document 00 23 19 “Location of Drawings and Project Manuals for Review”E. Document 00 25 13 “Pre-Bid Conference”F. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”G. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”H. Section 00 91 13 “Addenda”

1.5 MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS1. Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 1.1 to read as follows: The Bidding

Requirements consist of the Notice of Public Hearing, Notice of Letting and/or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplemental Instructions to Bidders including modifications and supplements, the Bid Form, Bid Security / Bid Bond (if required), Certificate of Insurance, Contractor’s Qualification Statement (if required) and all other Sample Bidding Documents and Contract Forms.








2. Revise the third sentence of the Paragraph 1.1 to read as follows: The Contract Documents consist of the Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Modifications, Supplementary and Other Conditions), Performance Bond, Labor and Materials Payment Bond, the Drawings, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to the execution of the Contract and all Change Order modifications thereto.

3. After Paragraph 1.9, insert the following paragraphs.a. 1.10. Throughout the Specifications and Drawings the word “shall” denotes

mandatory, the word “may” denotes permissive.b. 1.11. A cash allowance is a stipulated amount to be included in the Bid to account

for items as described in Section 01 21 00 “Allowances”, if included. This amount shall be applied in whole, or in part, or not applied at the discretion of the Owner after execution of the contract. Unused allowances in whole, or in part, shall be credited back to the Owner by means of Change Order at Project closeout.

c. 1.12. Install shall mean install only materials, components or equipment furnished by others. Materials. Components or equipment shall be received at the Site, unloaded, stored, protected, and installed in place, including final connections.

d. 1.13. Furnish shall mean furnish only. Materials, components or equipment shall be ordered, purchased, and delivered to the Site to be received by others. Installation will be by others as assigned.

e. 1.14. Provide shall mean furnish and install complete, in place and ready for use.f. 1.15 See Section 01 11 00 for further definitions regarding assignment of work and

work restrictions.

B. ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS1. Modify subparagraph 2.1.1 to read as follows: The Bidder has read and understands the

Bidding Documents including all addenda and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. The failure or omission of any Bidder to examine any form, instrument, or document, included or referenced, shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation with respect to those requirements and his Bid.

2. Modify subparagraph 2.1.3. to read as follows: The Bidder has visited the site, inspected the existing structures if any, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents and all addenda. The Bidder has made himself familiar with information presented at the Pre-Bid Conference, if scheduled, and other information available to Bidders. Submission of a Bid or Sub-Bid will be considered presumptive evidence that the Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions, the requirements of the Contract Documents, pertinent State and Local Codes, the condition of labor and materials markets, and the requirements of local utilities, and has made due allowance for these and all contingencies in his Bid.

3. Modify paragraph 2.1.4 to read as follows: The Bid is based on materials, equipment and systems, required by the Bidding Documents and/or prior approved substitutions as listed in the Addenda without exception.

4. Add the following paragraphs to Article 2 – Bidder’s Representations.a. 2.1.5 The Bidder acknowledges additional information available to Bidders as cited

in Document 00 31 21 and has made allowances in his Bid for contingencies indicated by such.

b. 2.1.6 The Bidder and his Sub-Bidders have examined the proposed use of and installation of all materials, components, systems and equipment as specified. Submission of a Bid or Sub-Bid will be considered presumptive evidence that the use, and installation of such is appropriate and consistent with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and Warranties. The Bidder shall make the same requirement of his Sub-Bidders.




c. 2.1.7 Any Bidder, by submission of his Bid, guarantees the Bid as good and honorable until, a) the Contract has been executed and Bonds, if required, have been furnished, or b) over thirty days (30) having elapsed since the date of receipt of Bids, or c) All Bids have been formally rejected by the Owner.

C. ARTICLE 3 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS1. Modify paragraph 3.1 – Copies to include …and complete copies of reference documents

… after the words “Bidding Documents” in the first sentence.2. Add the following sentence to paragraph 3.1.3: If single sheets of Drawings or individual

Specification Sections are provided to Sub-Bidders, it shall be the Bidder’s responsibility to verify that all requirements of the Contract Documents have been allowed for when accepting Sub-Bids from Subcontractors and Suppliers.

3. Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 3.1 – Copies:a. 3.1.5 All Bidders and Sub-bidders shall be registered with the Architect or the

Architect’s publishing agent, Action Reprographics, to receive project updates and addenda. Bidding documents may be viewed at Action’s website www.actionrepro.com

4. Add the following sentence to paragraph 3.2.3: Addendum will be issued to all Bidding Document holders of record, including all plan centers, as listed in the Notice of Letting or Invitation to Bid.

5. Modify paragraph 3.3.2 to include the following sentence as inserted before the last sentence: The Proposer shall highlight or otherwise demark any significant change or difference in the proposed substitution over that which was specified in such a manner as to bring it to the attention of the reviewing Architect or Engineer.

6. Add the following to Paragraph 3.3 - Substitutions: a. 3.3.5 All written requests for substitution shall be submitted on a completed copy of

Document 00 43 25 “Substitution Request Form”.b. 3.3.6 If circumstances do not permit a request for substitution to be submitted ten

days prior to the receipt of Bids, the proposed substitution may be submitted on Document 00 43 25 as an attachment to the Bid Form and shall state the value of the proposed substitution as an addition or deduction from the Base Bid amount, and shall include the value of revisions to other Work as required to accommodate the proposed substitution.

c. 3.3.7 After execution of the Contract, substitutions will be considered only under the circumstances set forth in Section 01 60 00 “Materials and Equipment”.

D. ARTICLE 4 – BIDDING PROCEDURES1. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 4.1 – Preparation of Bids.

a. 4.1.8 Time of Completion: In submitting his Bid, the Bidder agrees to commence work upon execution of the Contract and Notice to Proceed and to substantially complete the entire Project as per the Notice of Letting or Invitation to Bid. The Bidder shall acknowledge this date in the space provided on the Bid Form. If for some reason the Bidder cannot complete the Project by the date stipulated, he may indicate a different date on the Bid Form, but in so doing, he will understand this will be taken into account by the Owner in consideration of Bids.

The opportunity to enter a completion date other than that specified on the Bid Form shall be considered an opportunity to inform the Owner that the scheduled completion date cannot be met. The Bidder shall prepare his Bid considering continuous and conscientious effort to complete the Work on or before the completion date. This is not intended to allow the Contractor to create a bidding advantage for himself by manipulation of the completion date by considering a winter layoff to avoid the cost of temporary heat or enclosure or other advantage.





b. 4.1.9 Time and Date Stamp: Per statutory requirements, the separate envelopes containing the Bid Security and Bid Form shall have a blank on the outside for Time and Date Stamp and initials of the Owner’s authorized representative.

c. 4.1.10 Liquidated Damages: Liquidated Damages are NOT scheduled for this Project, for each day Substantial Completion is delayed beyond that scheduled.

d. 4.1.11 Bonus: There are no scheduled bonuses for early completion of this Project.e. 4.1.12 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda as provide for on the

Bid Form.2. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 4.2 – Bid Security

a. 4.2.4 Bid Security: Each Bid must be accompanied by a Bid Bond (AIA Document 310 – 1970), certified check or cashiers check in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bid amount including all ADD Alternates. Such Bid Bond or Check will be returned to all except the three lowest bidders within three days of receipt of Bids. The remaining Bid Bonds or checks will be returned promptly after a) the Contract has been executed and all bonds, if required, have been furnished, or b) more than thirty (30) days has elapsed since the receipt of Bids and no award has been made, or c) all bids have been formally rejected by the Owner.

b. 4.2.5 Bid Security shall accompany the Bid in a separate sealed envelope identified as Bid Bond or Bid Security.

3. Add the following paragraph to Article 4 – Bidding Proceduresa. 4.5 In general, Bidding Procedures will follow the guidelines set for in AIA

Document 501 / AGC Document 325 – Recommended Guide for Competitive Bidding Procedures and Contract Awards for Building Construction 1995 Edition and/or Manual of Recommended Procedure for Competitive Bidding and Award of Building Contracts published by The Construction Council of Iowa (CCI).

E. ARTICLE 5 – CONSIDERATION OF BIDS1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 5.2 – Rejection of Bids

a. 5.2.1 The Bidder is advised that the Owner reserves the right to reject any person, firm, or other party to whom it is proposed to award a Subcontract under this Contract, if it is in his best interest to do so. If upon award of the Contract and submission of the List of Major Suppliers and Subcontractors, a Subcontractor or Supplier is found to be unacceptable to the Owner, the Contractor shall secure an alternate Subcontractor or Supplier who is acceptable to the Owner. The Contract Amount will be adjusted accordingly, if required by appropriate Change Order.

2. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award)a. 5.3.3 Preference: By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to

products and provisions grown and produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor.

b. 5.3.4 Completion: Bidders are advised that timely completion of the Project, as scheduled, will be of paramount importance in consideration of Bids and evaluation of performance. The Owner will implement remedies as reserved by Contract to promote timely completion. A deviation of greater than two weeks from the approved Project Schedule shall result in the Contractor submitting a plan of correction to make up lost time to the satisfaction of the Owner. Bidders are further advised a deviation greater than three weeks from the approved Project Schedule, not otherwise agreed to by the Owner via Change Order, may initiate notice to the Surety Company. Additional delay without effort to correct or make up lost time may result in the Owner invoking his Bonding protection as reserved by the Contract Documents.

F. ARTICLE 7 – PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND1. Add the following to paragraph 7.1 – Bond Requirements




a. 7.1.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be required for the Project as follows:1) The Contractor will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Payment

Bond in the amount of the full Contract Sum, including Base Bid and all accepted Add Alternates, on AIA Form A312-2010.

2) The Bonds shall be issued by a responsible Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Iowa, and acceptable to the Owner.

3) The amount of the Bonds shall be increased to cover additions made to the Contract during execution of the Work including Change Orders.

4) The Cost of the Bonds shall be included in the proposed Contract Sum.5) If executed by an Attorney-in-Fact on behalf of the Surety Company, a

certified and current Power of Attorney shall be affixed to each Bond.

G. ARTICLE 8 – FORM OF AGREEMENT BEWTEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR1. Add the following paragraph to Article 8:

a. 8.1 The Form of Agreement shall be AIA Document A101–2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor as amended and supplemented by Document 00 52 13.

H. ARTICLE 9 – OTHER CONSIDERATIONS1. Add the following paragraphs to Article 9 – Other Considerations:

a. 9.1 Notice of Special Conditions: Attention is particularly called to those parts of the Contract Documents and Specifications which deal with the following; inspection and testing of materials, insurance requirements, Bond requirements, State sales taxes, and completion dates.

b. 9.2 Laws and Regulation: The Bidders attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State laws and municipal rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the construction of the Project shall apply to the Contract Documents throughout, and the shall be considered part of the Contract Documents as if contained therein.

c. 9.3 Requirements of Utility Companies: In submission of his Bid, the Contractor represents he is familiar with special requirements of the Utility Companies providing utilities to the Project, and has made allowances in his Bid to make the Work of this Contract to be in compliance with these requirements. The Contractor shall pay for all utility installation costs associated with the Project not assigned to others or provided under service agreement to the Owner.

d. 9.4 Service Tax: Bidders shall include in their Bid the Iowa Sales Tax on services where said service tax applies to paid services covered by the Contract, or any portion thereof, whether due from the Bidder or any of his Subcontractors or Suppliers.

e. 9.5 Sales Tax: Pursuant to Iowa Code 423.3(31a) and 423.3(80) the Owner complies with the requirements as an exempt entity, and as such is not required to pay Iowa State Sales Tax on goods or services purchased for the Contract. THE BIDDER SHALL NOT INCLUDE IOWA STATE SALES TAX IN THE AMOUNT OF HIS BID OR ANY ALTERNATES THERETO.

f. 9.6 Sales Tax Exemption Certificate: As an exempt entity, the Owner, will register the Project as exempt with the Iowa Department of Revenue & Finance. The Owner will then provide each contractor/subcontractor with an authorization letter and exemption certificate which will allow the purchase of materials from suppliers without tax.1) .1 More information on this process along with example documents is

available at the Iowa Department of Revenue & Finance website at http://www.state.ia.us/tax/business/contr-ExEnt.html




g. 9.7 Storm Water Pollution Protection and Erosion Control (All Contractors)1) .1 The Project and it’s implementation shall be in accordance with all

Federal, State and Local rules, ordinances and requirements with regard to prevention of water pollution. This includes the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (FWPCA) of 1972 as amended in 1990 and 1992 and all subsequent regulations established by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Iowa Department of Natural Resources (IDNR) and applicable Local ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible to implement the project in accordance with these rules and shall include the cost of same in the BASE BID.

2) .2 The Project does not qualify under the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Phase II Program MS4s Cities and will not be under a General Permit No. 2 “Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Sites”.

h. 9.8 Davis Bacon and Equal Opportunity Employment1) .1 The project financing does not include funds from the State of Iowa, nor

any Federal Funds, and is therefore not subject to Davis - Bacon Wage Determinations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTIONEND OF SECTION 00 22 13



DOCUMENT 00 23 19LOCATION OF DRAWINGS & PROJECT MANUALS FOR REVIEW

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Bidding Documents may be examined at the Administrative Offices of Marshalltown Community School District, 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, IA 50158, between 8:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday.

A. In accordance with Iowa Code Chapters 23.3, Bidding Documents will be available for use of product Suppliers Bidders and Sub-Bidders at:1. Master Builders of Iowa Plan Room at [email protected]

B. In accordance with Iowa Code Chapter 23.3 and 23.7, Notice to Bidders will be issued thru the Construction Update Network subscription base and others as listed below.

C. Bidding Documents will be available for use of product Suppliers, Bidders and Sub-Bidders at:1. Master Builders of Iowa, 221 Park St., PO Box 695, Des Moines, IA 503092. North Iowa Builders Exchange, 15 W. State St., P.O. Box 1128, Mason City, IA 504013. Greater Fort Dodge Growth Alliance, 24 N 9th St., Suite A, Fort Dodge, IA 505014. Sioux City Construction League, 3900 Stadium Dr., Sioux City, IA 511065. Minneapolis Builders Exchange, 1123 Glenwood Ave., Minneapolis, MN 554056. Sioux Falls Builders Exchange, 1418 North C Ave., Sioux Falls, SD 571047. Builders Exchange of Rochester, 108 Elton Hills Lane NW, Rochester, MN 559018. Omaha Builders Exchange, 4159 S 94th St., Omaha, NE 681279. TSP Inc., 1112 N. West Ave., Sioux Falls, SD 57104, Ph: 605-336-1160

1.2 All Bidders and Sub-bidders shall be registered with the Architect or the Architect’s publishing agent, Action Reprographics, to receive project updates and addenda. Bidding documents may be viewed at Action’s website www.actionrepro.com.

1.3 Bidders, Sub-Bidders and Material Suppliers who cannot, or prefer not to review Documents at the above locations, may obtain Bidding Documents they require by paying a document deposit and separate postage and handling fee. Deposit for full set of Drawings and Project Manual is $100.00. Shipping / distribution charges will be established by Action Reprographics at the cost of the bidder, payable to Action Reprographics. The Document Deposit shall be refunded upon return of complete set of Bidding Documents including Addenda in good condition.

1.4 Separate, or individual Drawings or Specification Sections, may be requested for the non-refundable cost of providing and mailing of same.

1.5 It is the responsibility of all Bidders to review the Bidding Documents in their entirety. No accommodation or Claim for extra cost will be allowed for Claims due to preparation of Bids using a partial or incomplete set of Bidding Documents.

1.6 Electronic Bid Documents are available from Action Reprographics in accordance with their distribution policy.

A. If electronic versions are ordered in lieu of hard copy version, no additional cost.B. If electronic versions are ordered in addition to hard copy versions, the Contractor will be

charged for the cost of the electronic versions.

1.7 In some instances, standard copy protected Documents are included in the Bidding and Contract by reference only and are not include in their entirety. Bidders, Sub-Bidders and Suppliers who wish a full copy of referenced standard Documents can obtain them at cost of providing same from the Architect or from the American Institute of Architects at the following address:



DOCUMENT 00 23 19LOCATION OF DRAWINGS & PROJECT MANUALS FOR REVIEW


1. American Institute of Architects, Iowa Chapter Office 400 Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, Iowa 50309Telephone: 515-244-7502 / Fax: 515-24-5347Email: [email protected], Website: www.aiaiowa.org

2. TSP, Inc.P.O. Box 1534, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158Telephone: 641-752-3930 / Fax: 641-752-4797Email: [email protected], Website: www.teamtsp.com



END OF SECTION – 00 23 19






DOCUMENT 00 25 13PRE-BID CONFERENCE


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.1. Related Documents:

a. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”b. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”c. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions Documentation”d. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Pre-Bid Conference

1. A Pre-Bid Conference will be held on site as follows:Date: Thursday, September 26, 2019Time: 3:30 PMPlace: Franklin Elementary School, 1315 W. Main Street, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

2. Prime Bidder Attendance: Attendance by Prime Bidders is encouraged but not mandatory.

3. Sub-Bidder Attendance: Attendance by Sub-Bidders is encouraged but not mandatory.4. Prime and Sub-Bidders unable to attend the Pre-Bid Conference, and wanting additional

site visits may make individual arrangements by contacting the Owner’s Representative per Document 00 01 01 – Title Sheet.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 10 00 “Summary of Project”

1.3 ATTENDANCEA. Owner’s representative(s).B. Architect, Engineer (if necessary).C. Prospective Prime Contractors: Recommended, not Mandatory.D. Prospective Subcontractors: Recommended, not Mandatory.E. Attendance is required to understand requirements and working conditions affecting Bid

Proposals. Lack of attendance may be construed to demonstrate the Bidder is not a “Responsible Bidder”. Non-attendance may also disadvantage the Contractor in his understanding of the Sequence of Work, Scope of Work, as defined by Section 01 10 00 Existing Conditions, and his ability to Work with the Owner in scheduling the Work.

1.4 AGENDAA. Discussion

1. Form of Contract – Base Bid & Alternates.2. Scope of Work / Sequence of Work3. Project Schedule4. Project Budget5. Contractor’s working conditions and use of site.6. Owner’s use and occupancy of adjacent building and operational conditions that may

affect Contractors hours and/or working conditions.7. Work by Owner or Others for the Owner.8. Existing Conditions.

B. Technical questions, regarding Scope of Work/Sequence of Work to Owner or Architect / Engineer.

C. Follow-up: Architect/Engineer will issue Addenda and/or Minutes to Contractors at the Pre-Bid Conference with discussion points and/or directives to pertinent questions involving bidding procedures not answered at conference.


DOCUMENT 00 25 13PRE-BID CONFERENCE


1.5 REVIEW OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERSA. Construction documents of existing conditions, if any.B. Site survey and Geotechnical Report, if any.C. Other relevant Project Documentation as may be available.

1.6 SITE BUILDING REVIEW A. Owner and/or the Architect will conduct, at the conference, a brief tour of the site and existing

building.B. Any Prime Bidder wishing further building review shall schedule same prior to preparing Bid with

an owner’s representative.C. It is the Owner’s intent to afford as much information as possible to Bidders regarding existing

conditions at the conference and building review.

Notes:




DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

TSP, Inc. © 00 26 00 1/2 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS BID SET 09/04/2019

DOCUMENT 00 26 00PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.1 DEFINITIONSA. Procurement Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment,

and methods of construction from those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, submitted prior to receipt of bids.

B. Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those indicated in the Contract Documents, submitted following Contract award. See Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for conditions under which Substitution requests will be considered following Contract award.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.3 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTIONSA. Procurement Substitutions, General: By submitting a bid, the Bidder represents that its bid is

based on materials and equipment described in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, including Addenda. Bidders are encouraged to request approval of qualifying substitute materials and equipment when the Specifications Sections list materials and equipment by product or manufacturer name.

B. Procurement Substitution Requests will be received and considered by Owner when the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action:1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents,

including the level of quality of the Work represented by the requirements therein.3. The request is fully documented and properly submitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Procurement Substitution Request: Submit to Architect. Procurement Substitution Request must

be made in writing in compliance with the following requirements:1. Requests for substitution of materials and equipment will be considered if received no

later than 10 days prior to date of bid opening.2. Submittal Format: Submit three copies of each written Procurement Substitution Request,

using form bound in Project Manual (Form 10 25 13) or CSI Substitution Request Form 1.5C.

3. Submittal Format: Submit Procurement Substitution Request, using format provided on Project Web site.a. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each

request. Include related Specifications Sections and drawing numbers.b. Provide complete documentation on both the product specified and the proposed

substitute, including the following information as appropriate:1) Point-by-point comparison of specified and proposed substitute product

data, fabrication drawings, and installation procedures.2) Copies of current, independent third-party test data of salient product or

system characteristics.3) Samples where applicable or when requested by Architect.4) Detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitute with

those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 26 00PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


5) Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

6) Research reports, where applicable, evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.

7) Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitute.

c. Provide certification by manufacturer that the substitute proposed is equal to or superior to that required by the Procurement and Contracting Documents, and that its in-place performance will be equal to or superior to the product or equipment specified in the application indicated.

d. Bidder, in submitting the Procurement Substitution Request, waives the right to additional payment or an extension of Contract Time because of the failure of the substitute to perform as represented in the Procurement Substitution Request.

B. Architect's Action:1. Architect may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation

of the Procurement Substitution Request. Architect will notify all bidders of acceptance of the proposed substitute by means of an Addendum to the Procurement and Contracting Documents.

C. Architect's approval of a substitute during bidding does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to submit required shop drawings and to comply with all other requirements of the Contract Documents.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 26 00



DOCUMENT 00 31 19EXISTING CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 21 13 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.

b. Document 00 25 13 “Pre-Bid Conference”c. Document 00 31 19.01 “Existing Conditions – Photographs”: Photographs of

relevant pre-construction existing conditions.d. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”: Site Survey, Geotechnical

Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report.

1.2 SUMMARY:A. Section Includes:

1. Requirements for Bidders to familiarize themselves with Laws, Ordinances and Regulations governing the Work.

2. Requirements for Bidders to familiarize themselves with Physical Characteristics of adjacent lands and right of ways affecting execution of the Work.

3. Requirements for Bidders to familiarize themselves with existing conditions Requirements for Bidders to familiarize themselves with Laws, Ordinances and Regulations governing the Work.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work”2. Section 01 35 16 “Alteration Project Procedures”3. Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”4. Section 01 45 23 “Quality Control & Testing and Inspecting Services”: Testing by Others

for the Owner5. Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls”6. Section 01 73 29 “Cutting and Patching”7. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for notification requirements if

materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered.

1.3 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES:A. Prior to Bid or Sub-Bid Submittal:

1. Each bidder, PRIME OR SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER, shall be held responsible to have thoroughly examined all Drawings, Specifications and the premises.

2. He shall inform himself of the conditions under which the Work is to be performed; concerning site of the Project, structure of the ground, obstacles which may be encountered and all other relevant matters concerning Work to be performed including surrounding parking lots, drives, trees, lawns, mechanical/electrical equipment, overhead electrical telephone lines and existing site structures etc.

3. The Bidder will be responsible to have examined delivery and haul routes as relates to large equipment and structural members and shall have familiarized himself with all restrictions and limitations.

4. The Bidder shall have familiarized himself with all applicable codes per Section 01 41 00 and other rules and regulations having jurisdiction. The Bidder shall have familiarized himself with all required inspections, fees and permits and shall have included the cost of same in his Bid.

5. No extra compensation shall be allowed for failure to secure information which was available prior to the Bid or Sub-Bid Submittal.

DIVISION 00 – BIDDING / NOTICES / REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 31 19EXISTING CONDITIONS


B. Subsequent to Bid or Sub-Bid Submittal:1. Before ordering any materials or doing any Work, Prime Contractor or Subcontractor

shall verify Drawing dimensions by measurements at the existing building site and shall be responsible for their correctness.

2. No extra compensation shall be allowed because of differences between actual measurements and the dimensions shown on the Drawings.

1.4 DISCREPANCIES:A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been

fully resolved to the satisfaction of the Architect.C. See Section 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions, for information on interpretation of

discrepancies as contained in the Contract, subsequent to Bid.

1.5 PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING CONDITIONSA. See following pages for photographs of the existing site.





DOCUMENT 00 31 19.01EXISTING CONDITIONS – PHOTOGRAPHS

TSP, Inc. © 00 31 19.01 - 1/17 06190256.00JWS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

1. Anson – North Entrance – Drs. 3 & 4

2. Anson – West Entrance 2a 2c




3. Anson – West Entrance – Interior Doors

4. Anson – Lower Level East Entrance




5. Fisher – Main Entrnace

6. Fisher – Food Service Playground Access




7. Franklin – Main Entrance

8. Franklin – Upper Playground




9. Franklin – Lower Level East Doors

10. Franklin – Lower Level North Doors




11. Hoglan – Service Entrance

12. Hoglan - Playground




13. Rogers – Main Entrance

14. Rogers – interior vestibule & office doors




15. Rogers – West Playground Doors

16. Rogers – South Playground Doors




17. Woodbury – Playground Doors

18. Woodbury – Server Room Loading Dock




19. Lenihan – Main Entrance

20. Lenihan – Interior Entrance Vestibule




21. Lenihan – Vestibule to Office West Entrance (LIS-DR-26)

22. Lenihan – Loading Dock




23. Miller – Main Entrance

24. Miller – Main Entrance




25. Miller – MMS-DR-21/22

26. Miller – MMS-DR – 23/24 MMS-DR-1/2




27. MHS – Main Entrance

28. MHS – Main Entrance Server Room




29. MHS – South East Entrance

30. MHS – Auditorium Exit




31. SSC – Main Entrance SSC-DR 17/18

32. SSC – DR-19/20




33. SSC – Loading Dock

34. SSC – DR-2 DR-5



DOCUMENT 00 31 21INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 21 13 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.

b. Document 00 25 13 “Pre-Bid Conference”c. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: d. Document 00 31 19.01 “Existing Conditions – Photographs”: Photographs of

relevant pre-construction existing conditions.

1.2 SUMMARY:A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting

Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for notification requirements if materials

suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered.

1.3 INFORMATION AVAILABLE:A. Site Survey:

1. Not ApplicableB. Geotechnical Data:

1. Not ApplicableC. Existing Building Construction Drawings:

1. Existing drawings that include information on existing conditions including previous construction at Project site(s) are available for viewing at the office of Architect and / or at the office of Owner.

2. Available for review at the Pre-Bid Conference and on request of the Architect.a. Multiple Sites – Multiple Projects

1) The Owner and Architect maintain and archive of all District Facilities and Sites that are too numerous to mention.a) Available for review at the Office of the Owner upon requestb) This archive was consulted and referenced in Preparation of these

Construction Documents.c) Most relevant and recent project follow.

b. 2011 Security and Surveillance Systems Deployment at Marshalltown Senior High School and Miller Middle School1) As prepared by: TSP, Inc., 306 South 17th Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

a) Project No.: 06-100106.00b) Date: July 14, 2015

c. 2015 Entrance Vestibule Security Upgrade at Franklin, Woodbury, Hoglan Elementary Schools & Marshalltown Learning Academy And District Access Controls System1) As prepared by: TSP, Inc., 306 South 17th Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

a) Project No.: 06-130154.10b) Date: July 14, 2015


DOCUMENT 00 31 21INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS


D. Photographs of Existing Conditions:1. See Document 00 31 19.01 “Existing Conditions – Photographs”: Photographs of relevant

pre-construction existing conditions.

E. State Fire Marshall Submittals and Review: N/A

1.4 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INFORMATION:A. An existing asbestos report for Project Site and Facility, is available for viewing at the office of

Owner’s Facility Director.B. An existing lead report for Project(s) and Facility, is available for viewing at the office of Owner’s

Facility Director.

1.5 INTERPRETATION:A. No representation or warranty is made by the Owner or TSP Inc. of the adequacy or contents of

any other additional information not prepared by Architect/Engineer.B. Information available to Bidders is provided as a convenience only and not represented as

accurate or adequate for any particular purpose. The user assumes all responsibility for relying on Information Available to Bidders without independent site verification of data or information contained therein.

C. Information available to bidders is not a part of the contract documents.




BID DOCUMENTS

DOCUMENT 00 41 13BID FORM - SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT

TSP, Inc. © 00 41 13 - 1 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

BID FOR SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT FOR LUMP SUM AMOUNT

MCSD Security Management System - Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa

PLACE: MCSD Support Service CenterConference Room, 1002 South 3rd Ave.Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

TIME: Thursday, October 3, 2019 - 2:00 p.m.

Proposal of (hereinafter called "Bidder")

(a corporation/ a partnership/ an individual) doing business as

.

TO: THE MARSHALLTOWN COMMUNITY SCHOOL BOARD

The Bidder, in compliance with your Notice of Letting for MCSD Security Management System – Phase 3, Marshallto2wn Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa, having examined the Specifications with related documents, the site of the proposed Work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies to accomplish the Work described in the Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work required under the Contract Documents, of which this Proposal is a part.

The Bidder hereby agrees to begin Work on or before a date to be specified in written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to Substantially Complete the Project as stipulated in the Specifications on multiple dates with all work Substantially Complete February 14, 2020.

Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addendum:

No. _________ Dated ________________ No. _________ Dated ________________

No. _________ Dated ________________ No. _________ Dated ________________

BASE BID:

MCSD Security Management System – Phase 3, Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa, as described in Contract Documents for the sum of:

____________________________________________________________________________________

($ _________________________________________________________________________________)

Amount to be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, amount shown in words will govern.

IOWA SALES TAX: Not included in Bids, Owner is tax exempt entity

BID DOCUMENTS


TSP, Inc. © 00 41 13 - 2 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES: (see Section 01 23 00 – Alternates)

Alternate #AC-01: Additional Access Controls - Miller Middle School and Marshalltown High School:

Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management System and DevicesDescription: State the Amount to be ADDED to the BASE BID for equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules, and additional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System.

ADD to the BASE BID the sum of: $

Alternate #AC-02: Additional Access Controls – Lenihan Intermediate School:

Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management System and DevicesDescription: State the Amount to be ADDED to the BASE BID for equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System.


Alternate #VS-01: Additional Video Surveillance System Components for Elementary Schools:

Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management System and DevicesDescription: State the Amount to be ADDED to the BASE BID to provide new or additional video surveillance system components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rogers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School


Alternate #VS-02: Additional Video Surveillance System Components for Lenihan Intermediate School and Support Services Center / MLA:

Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management System and DevicesDescription: State the Amount to be ADDED to the BASE BID to provide new or additional video surveillance system components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Lenihan Intermediate School and Support Services Center / MLA.


BID DOCUMENTS


TSP, Inc. © 00 41 13 - 3 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES: N/A (As more fully described in Section 01 22 00 – Measurement & Payment) – Unit Prices are not a Basis of Award:

Substantial Completion Dates Specified for both Base Bid and Alternates are as follows. If these dates cannot be met indicate here the date on which completion can be expected with the Bid.

Marshalltown High School (MHS) Server Room (MDF): January 17, 2020Date: _______________________________

Franklin Elementary School (FrES): November 29, 2019Date: _______________________________

Rogers Elementary School (RES): December 6, 2019Date: _______________________________

Woodbury Elementary School (WES): December 13, 2019Date: _______________________________

Hoglan Elementary School (HES): December 20, 2019Date: _______________________________

Anson Elementary School (AES): December 27, 2019Date: _______________________________

Fisher Elementary School (FiES): January 3, 2020Date: _______________________________

Support Services Building and January 10, 2020Marshalltown Learning Academy (SSC/MLA): Date: _______________________________

Lenihan Intermediate School (LIS): January 17, 2020Date: _______________________________

Miller Middle School (MMS): January 24, 2020Date: _______________________________

Marshalltown High School (MHS): January 31, 2020Date: _______________________________

It is understood the project shall continue uninterrupted from beginning to end under a concerted and conscientious effort. The completion date, if changed, reflects only availability of labor and materials, fabrication time, or delivery time and does not represent weather shut-down for competitive advantage. Change in date will not be used as a basis of award.

Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informalities in the Bidding.

Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and valid and may not be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving Bids.

BID DOCUMENTS


TSP, Inc. © 00 41 13 - 4 06-190256.00DDS - 09/04/2019

Upon notice of the acceptance of this Bid, Bidder will execute the formal Contract attached within 10 days and deliver a Surety Bonds or Bonds as required by Document 00 72 13, Article 11, and as referenced by Documents 00 61 00.

The Bid Security in the form of Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashiers Check (circle one) is attached in the sum of _________________________________________$_________________ or 5% is to become the property of the Owner in the event the Contractor is awarded the Project and the Contract and Bond are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby.

(Seal - if Bid is by a corporation) Firm Name: ___________________________________

Official Address ________________________________

_____________________________________________

By___________________________________________

Title _________________________________________

Incorporated ____ (yes) _____ (no)

Telephone No.:_________________________________

Fax No.:______________________________________

Federal Tax Identification No.: ____________________

Iowa Contractor Registration No.: __________________


DIVISION 00 - BID DOCUMENTS


DOCUMENT 00 43 13 BID SECURITY FORMS – AIA A310 - 2010

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: Bid Bond – AIA Document A310 – 2010 Edition.

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A310 “Bid Bond” 2010 Edition, is not bound within this Project Manual,

but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented below shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These Bond requirements as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Prime Contractors.


Subcontractors and Suppliers shall obtain and pay for original documents. B. Copies of these documents may be viewed or obtained at cost of providing same as follows:



1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”B. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”C. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”D. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Form”E. Document 00 43 13 “Bid Security Forms” – Completed AIA Document A310 (If Required)F. Section 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”G. Section 00 52 13 “Form of Agreement – AIA Document A101 – 2017”H. Section 00 61 00 “Project Bonds & Insurance”I. Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions – AIA A201 – 2017”J. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”K. Section 00 91 13 “Addenda”

1.5 DOCUMENT AMOUNTS AND LIMITSA. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Security Form” – AIA Document A310 – (When Required by Document

00 11 00 “Notice of Letting” and Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”)1. The Bid Security Bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of

the Bid including all ADD alternates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not UsedEND OF SECTION 00 43 13





DIVISION 00 – BID DOCUMENTS

SECTION 00 43 13BID SECURITY FORMS – AIA A310 - 2010



DIVISION 00 - AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENT / FORMS


DOCUMENT 00 51 00NOTICE OF AWARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

TO:_________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________

PROJECT Description: Security Management System – Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT: All Work (General, Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical)

The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its Notice of Letting dated _____________________________________, and Information for Bidders.

You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for a total Contract Amount of:

____________________________________________________________________________________

($ )

This amount includes Base Bid (including all addenda) and Alternates _.

You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required CONTRACTOR'S Performance BOND, Payment BOND and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you.

If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said BONDS within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER's acceptance of your BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your BID BOND or BID SECURITY, if one was required. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law.

You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER.

Dated this ____ day of _____________________, 2019.

Marshalltown Community School District

By____________________________________

Title___________________________________

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICEReceipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged

By (Printed Name)_____________________________________________________________________

this the ___________________________day of _______________________________________, 2019.

By (Signature) ________________________________________________________________________

Title ________________________________________________________________________________

Note: This Document is issued by the Owner to Contractor


DOCUMENT 00 51 00NOTICE OF AWARD

TSP, Inc. © 00 51 00 - 2/2 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/042019




DIVISION 00 - AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENTS / FORMS


SECTION 00 52 13 AGREEMENT FORMS – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Agreement Form – AIA A101-2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUMB. Modifications to the referenced AgreementC. Supplemental paragraphs to the referenced AgreementD. Deletions to the referenced AgreementE. Agreed deletions, modifications and supplemental paragraphs to General Conditions AIA

A201–2017 as recommended by the Iowa Construction Industry Forum (ICIF) which is a partnership among the Iowa Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Iowa), the American Council of Engineering Companies of Iowa (ACEC / Iowa), and the Master Builders of Iowa (MBI).

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A101-2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM is not bound within this Project Manual, but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented below shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs the modifications and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These General Conditions as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Prime Contractors and through them their Subcontractors and Suppliers.





1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”B. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”C. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”D. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Form”E. Document 00 43 13 “Bid Security Forms – AIA Document A310-2010” (If Required)F. Section 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”G. Section 00 55 00 “Notice to Proceed”H. Section 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance” (AIA Documents A310-2010, A312-2010,

G715-1991)I. Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions to the Contract for Construction - AIA A201–2007”J. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”K. Section 00 91 13 “Addenda”






SECTION 00 52 13AGREEMENT FORMS – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT


1.5 MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO THE REFERENCED AGREEMENT FORMA. AIA A101 – 2017 COVER PAGE

1. The “Project”, the “Owner”, and the “Architect” shall be as identified on Document 00 01 01 – Title Sheet.

B. GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions” which

incorporates by reference AIA A201–2007 Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” with deletions, additions and modifications to the General Conditions including those as recommended by the Iowa Construction Industry Forum (ICIF) which is a partnership among the Iowa Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Iowa), the American Council of Engineering Companies of Iowa (ACEC / Iowa), and the Master Builders of Iowa (MBI).

C. ARTICLE 1 – THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS1. Revise the first sentence to read as follows: The Contract Documents consist of the Form

of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and all exhibits, Conditions of the Contract (General, Modifications, Supplementary and Other Conditions), Performance Bond, Labor and Materials Payment Bond, the Drawings, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement all of which form the Contract, and are as fully part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein.

D. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION1. Add the following paragraphs to Article 3 Date of Commencement and Substantial

Completiona. 3.4 Unless otherwise noted, the Date of Substantial Completion shall be as

indicated in Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”, and Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”, Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders” and / or Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work”.

b. 3.5 Completion: Timely completion of the Project, as scheduled, is of paramount importance in evaluation of performance. The Owner will implement remedies as reserved by Contract to promote timely completion. A deviation of greater than two weeks from the approved Project Schedule shall result in the Contractor submitting a plan of correction to make up lost time to the satisfaction of the Owner. A deviation greater than three weeks from the approved Project Schedule, not otherwise agreed to by the Owner via Change Order, may initiate notice to the Surety Company. Additional delay without effort to correct or make up lost time may result in the Owner invoking his Bonding protection as reserved by the Contract Documents, which may include augmenting the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s forces, or replacing the Contractor and / or his Subcontractors.

c. 3.5 Liquidated Damages: There are no Liquidated Damages scheduled for this Project.

d. 3.6 Bonus: This is no bonus scheduled for early completion of the Project.E. ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS

1. Delete paragraph 5.1.3 and substitute the following:a. 5.1.3 All Prime Contractors shall submit Applications for Payment to the Architect

no less than three (3) days before Monthly Construction Meetings which will be scheduled at the Pre-Construction Conference but not later than the first working day of each month. The Owner shall act on Certified Requests for Payment at the next regularly scheduled Board or Council Meeting.

2. Paragraph 5.1.6 shall read as follows:a. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each

progress payment shall be computed as follows:1) .1Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed

Work as determined by multiplying the percentage of completion of each




portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of five percent (5%). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in subparagraphs 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201–2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

2) .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation into the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of five percent (5%);

3) 3. Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and4) 4. Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a

Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201 - 2007.

3. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:a. .1 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage shall be included only after prior

notice, discussion and agreement with Owner and Architect.b. .2 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage as agreed shall be accompanied

by “Consent of Surety for Payment or Partial Payment of Retainage”.c. .3 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage shall be accompanied by an

executed lien waiver from the Subcontractor and/or Supplier on whose behalf payment is being requested.

d. .4 Request for payment or reduction of retainage may be subject to Statutory Law and be payable only after acceptance by resolution of the Board and passage of the statutory 30 day period for claims by Subcontractors and Suppliers.

4. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 5.2 Final Payment.a. 5.2.3 At Final Payment will be paid in accordance with statutory requirements,

upon completion of all Work with concurrence of Architect, and Owner and completion of the following:1) Substantial Completion2) Issuance of Occupancy Permit3) Issuance of Substantial Completion Certificate4) Completion of Punch List Items5) Processing of Final Change Orders6) Submission of Request for Final Payment7) Submission of Consent of Surety to Final Payment8) Submission of Lien Waivers from Major Subcontractors and Suppliers9) Notice to Subcontractors and Suppliers of Request for Retainage and / or

Final Payment10) Resolution by the Owner to Accept the Project as complete.11) Elapse of the statutory 30 day waiting period from Owner’s acceptance for

Subcontractor and Supplier claims.12) Submission of all Closeout Documentation

F. ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 6.1 Initial Decision Maker

a. 6.1.1 The initial decision maker(s) shall be the Architect and Engineer(s) of record in accordance with their discipline as identified on Document 00 01 05 “Architect / Engineer Certification”.

2. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 6.2 Binding Dispute Resolutiona. 6.2.1 X Litigation per AIA Document A201–2007.

G. ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS1. Change subparagraph 9.1.3 to read as follows:




a. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract shall be per Exhibit “A” as attached, Document 00 01 10 “Table of Contents”, all Documents listed under “Conditions of the Contract”

2. Change subparagraph 9.1.4 to read as follows:a. 9.1.4 The Specifications: See Exhibit “A” as attached, Document 00 01 10 “Table

of Contents”, all Sections listed after “Specifications”3. Change subparagraph 9.1.5 to read as follows:

a. 9.1.5 The Drawings: See Exhibit “B” as attached, Document 00 01 15 “List of Drawings”.

4. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 9.1.7.2a. Document 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance” – Executed Bonds and

Certificate of Insurance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not Used




DOCUMENT 00 55 00NOTICE TO PROCEED

PART 1 - GENERAL

TO: _____________________________ DATE: ________________________________

_____________________________ Project: Security Management System – Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District

_____________________________ 1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 TSP C/N: 06190256.00

_____________________________

You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated ____________

_________________, 2019, on or before ______________________, 2019, and you are to complete the

Base Bid portion of the WORK within ______________________ consecutive calendar days thereafter.

The dates of Substantial Completion: Friday, January 24, 2020

Marshalltown Community School DistrictOwner

By _________________________________________

Title ________________________________________

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE

Receipt of the above NOTICE TO

PROCEED is hereby acknowledged

By (Printed Name) ________________________________________________

this the ______________ day of ________________________________, 2019.

By (Signature) ___________________________________________________

Title ___________________________________________________________

Employer Identification Number (EIN): ________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT IS ISSUED BY THE OWNER TO CONTRACTOR





DOCUMENT 00 55 00NOTICE TO PROCEED



DIVISION 00 – AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENT / FORMS

TSP, Inc. © 00 60 00 - 1 / 2 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

SECTION 00 60 00PROJECT FORMS

PART 1 - GENERAL:



a. Document 00 43 13 “Bid Security Forms – AIA Document A310-210”b. Document 00 52 13 “Agreement Forms – Single Prime Contract – AIA A101-2017”c. Document 00 61 00 “Bonds and Insurance”d. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions – AIA A201-2007”e. Document 00 65 83 “Contractor’s Certificates – Hazardous Materials Exclusion

Certificate”


1. Project FormsB. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 26 00 “Contract Modification Procedures”2. Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures”

1.3 FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONSA. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be

used for Project:1. AIA Document A101-2017, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and

Contractor, Stipulated Sum."a. The General Conditions for Project are AIA Document A201-2007, "General

Conditions of the Contract for Construction."2. The General Conditions are incorporated by reference.3. The Supplementary Conditions for Project are separately prepared and included in the

Project Manual.4. Owner's document(s) bound following this Document.

a. Document 00 65 83 “Contractor’s Certificates – Hazardous Materials Exclusion Certificate”

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMSA. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General

Requirements.B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects;

http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.C. Preconstruction Forms:

1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312-2010, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond."

2. Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715-2017, "Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."

D. Information and Modification Forms:1. Form for Requests for Information (RFIs): AIA Document G716-2004, "Request for

Information (RFI)."2. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709-2001, "Work Changes Proposal

Request."3. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701-2017, "Change Order."4. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work: AIA Document G710-

2017, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

DIVISION 00 – AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENTS / FORMS

SECTION 00 60 00PROJECT FORMS


5. Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714-2017, "Construction Change Directive."6. Certificate of Substantial Completion: AIA Document G704-2017 “Certificate of

Substantial Completion”E. Payment Forms:

1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703-1992, "Continuation Sheet."2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703-1992, "Application and Certificate for

Payment and Continuation Sheet."3. Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of

Payment of Debts and Claims."4. Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit

of Payment of Release of Liens."5. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final

Payment."6. Form of Consent of Surety – Reduction or Partial Release of Retainage: AIA Document

G707A-1994 “Consent of Surety – Reduction or Partial Release of Retainage”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used


DI(VISION 00 - AGREEMENT / AWARD DOCUMENT / FORMS


DOCUMENT 00 61 00PROJECT BONDS & INSURANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Bid Bond – AIA Document A312-2010 EditionB. Performance Bond – AIA Document A312–2010 EditionC. Labor and Material Payment Bond – AIA Document A312–2010 EditionD. Certificate of Insurance – Accord Certificate of Insurance 25-S, August 2001 Edition with AIA

Document G715-2017 Supplemental Attachment 2017 Edition

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A310-2010 “Bid Bond” 2010 Edition, is not bound within this Project

Manual, but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented below shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These Bond requirements as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Prime Contractors.

B. The AIA Document G312-2010 “Performance Bond” 2010 Edition, AIA Document G312 “Payment Bond” 2010 Edition, is not bound within this Project Manual, but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented below shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These Bond requirements as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Prime Contractors, and through him to all his Subcontractors and Suppliers.

C. The Accord Certificate of Insurance 25-S, August 2001 Edition, and AIA Document G-715-2017 “Supplemental Attachment” 1991 Edition are not bound within this Project Manual but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not modified or supplemented below shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These Insurance requirements as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Prime Contractors, and through him to all his Subcontractors and Suppliers who shall provide similar protection to the Project, the Owner, and the Architect / Engineer.

1.3 TO OBTAIN REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:

A. Referenced documents are copyrighted by the American Institute of Architects. Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers shall obtain and pay for original documents.

B. Copies of these documents may be viewed or obtained at cost of providing same as follows:1. American Institute of Architects

Iowa Chapter Office 400 Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, Iowa 50309Telephone: 515-244-7502 / Fax: 515-24-5347Email: [email protected] Website: www.aiaiowa.org

2. TSP, Inc.P.O. Box 1534, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158Telephone: 641-752-3930 / Fax: 641-752-4797Email: [email protected] Website: www.teamtsp.com








1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”B. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”C. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”D. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Form”E. Document 00 43 13 “Bid Security Forms – AIA Document A310–2010 (If Required)”F. Section 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”G. Section 00 52 13 “Form of Agreement – AIA Document A101–2017 with Modifications and

Additions”H. Section 00 55 00 “Notice to Proceed”I. Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions to the Contract for Construction AIA A201-2017”J. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”K. Document 00 91 13 “Addenda”

1.5 DOCUMENT AMOUNTS AND LIMITS

A. Document 00 43 13 “Bid Security Form – AIA Document A310–2010” – (When Required by Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”)1. The Bid Security Bond shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of

the Bid including all ADD alternates.

B. Performance Bond – AIA Document A312-20101. The Performance Bond shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the

total amount of the Bid including all ADD alternates.

C. Labor and Material Payment Bond – AIA Document A312-20101. The Bid Security Bond shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the

total amount of the Bid including all ADD alternates.

D. Certificate of Insurance Certificate of Insurance – Accord Certificate of Insurance 25-S, August 2001 Edition with AIA Document G715-1991 Supplemental Attachment 1991 Edition.

1.6 INSURANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR:A. Upon Notice of Award and prior to starting Work, the Contractors shall provide certificates of

coverage of all insurance to the Architect. Form AIA G715, Accord For Certification of Insurance - Construction may be used. After approval of the policies, the Contractor shall not cause them to be canceled or permit them to lapse until Contract has been completed and the Work finally accepted. (Two (2) copies to the Architect, of which one will be provided to the Owner).

B. Contractor’s Liability Insurance: (Per AIA A201-2007 Article 11):

Type of Insurance Liability Limit

Accord Certificate of Insurance 25-S - 2001 with AIA G715-1991 Supplemental AttachmentAIA A201-2007 11.1.1.1 Workman’s Compensation

Iowa Statutory Requirements, if Greater, Otherwise as follows:Each Accident $ 500,000Disease – Each Employee $ 500,000Disease – Policy Limit $ 500,000

AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.2 Injury, disease, death – Employee $1,000,000*AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.3 Injury, disease, death – Others $1,000,000*AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.4 Personal Injury Adv. liability $1,000,000*AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.5 Property Damage other than the Work $1,000,000*AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.6 Motor Vehicle

(Owned, Hired, Non-Owned) $1,000,000*




AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.7 Completed Operations (One Year Min.)Bodily Injury Liability $2,000,000*Property Damage Liability $2,000,000*

AIA A201-2007 11.1.1.8 Contractual Liability (3.18) $1,000,000*Damage to Rented Premises $ 100,000*Medical Expenses (Any one person) $ 5,000*General Liability Aggregate $2,000,000Umbrella Liability Coverage $3,000,000* Per Occurrence

Contractor’s Liability Insurance to name the Owner, the Architect and his Consultants as additional insured.

The Contractor to reimburse the Owner up to $1,000 on each claim made against the Owner’s Builder’s Risk Policy

1.7 INSURANCE BY THE OWNERA. Substitute the following in lieu of Article 11.3.1 of General Conditions:B. The Owner will maintain general coverage for these Contracts and that normal to the building

and will provide Builders Risk Insurance for the Work of these Contracts including vandalism and malicious mischief.

C. The Contractor shall carry his own glass and equipment insurance. Each Contractor shall examine and be responsible for determining the proper coverage of his interests.

D. The Contractor shall pay the deductible amount of up to $1000.00 for Claims made under Builders Risk Insurance.

E. The Owner shall continue to carry Builders Risk Insurance subsequent to occupancy at Substantial Completion, and shall obtain "Use and Occupancy" endorsement to this policy which shall remain in effect until final closeout.

F. The Owner shall provide evidence of insurance to the Contractor.G. Owner’s Liability Insurance: (Per AIA A201-2007 Article 11):

Builder’s Risk – All Risk100% on the Contract Amount including Alternates and Change Orders.

Use and Occupancy Endorsement – At Substantial Completion thru Final Closeout










DOCUMENT 00 65 83CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATES –

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EXCLUSION CERTIFICATE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ASBESTOS CONTAINING BUILDING MATERIALS (ACBM) EXCLUSION CERTIFICATION:

I, the undersigned Contractor, hereby certify to the Owner that, to the best of my knowledge, no

asbestos materials or asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) or other hazardous material

were used or introduced on this project. No existing hazardous materials or asbestos was

disturbed in the performance of the Work comprising the Project.

PROJECT NAME: Security Management System – Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District1002 S. 3rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50126

PRIME CONTRACTOR’S NAME:

_____________________________________________________________________________

PRIME CONTRACTOR’S ADDRESS:

_____________________________________________________________________________

PRIME CONTRACTOR’S SIGNATURE:

_____________________________________________________________________________

DATE:

_____________________________________________________________________________





DOCUMENT 00 65 83CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATES –

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EXCLUSION CERTIFICATE



DIVISION 00 – CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT


SECTION 00 72 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS – AIA A201-2007

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. General Conditions – AIA A201-2007 General Conditions to the Contract for ConstructionB. Agreed deletions, modifications and supplemental paragraphs as recommended by the

Iowa Construction Industry Forum (ICIF) which is a partnership among the Iowa Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Iowa), the American Council of Engineering Companies of Iowa (ACEC / Iowa), and the Master Builders of Iowa (MBI).

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A201-2007 “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”

2007 Edition, is not bound within this Project Manual but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not deleted, modified or supplemented shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs, the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These General Conditions as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers.



1. American Institute of Architects Iowa Chapter Office 400 Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, Iowa 50309Telephone: 515-244-7502 / Fax: 515-24-5347 Email: [email protected] Website: www.aiaiowa.org


1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”B. Document 00 52 13 “Agreement Forms – AIA A101-2017”C. Document 00 55 00 “Notice to Proceed”D. Document 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance” (A310-2010, A312-2010, G715-1991)E. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”F. Document 00 91 13 “Addenda”









SECTION 00 72 13GENERAL CONDITIONS – AIA A201-2007





SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. General Conditions – AIA A201-2007 General Conditions to the Contract for ConstructionB. Deletions to the referenced General ConditionsC. Modifications to the referenced General ConditionsD. Supplemental paragraphs to the General ConditionsE. Agreed deletions, modifications and supplemental paragraphs as recommended by the

Iowa Construction Industry Forum (ICIF) which is a partnership among the Iowa Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Iowa), the American Council of Engineering Companies of Iowa (ACEC / Iowa), and the Master Builders of Iowa (MBI).

1.2 INCORPORATION BY REFERENCEA. The AIA Document A201-2007 “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”

2007 Edition, is not bound within this Project Manual but is incorporated into the Bidding and Contract Documents by reference and shall govern as if contained herein except as modified or supplemented below. All provisions of the referenced document not deleted, modified or supplemented shall remain in full force and effect. Where discrepancies occur between the referenced document and these modifications and supplemental paragraphs, the modification and supplemental paragraphs shall govern. These General Conditions as modified and supplemented below shall apply to all Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers.



1. American Institute of Architects - Iowa Chapter Office 400 Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, Iowa 50309Telephone: 515-244-7502 / Fax: 515-24-5347Email: [email protected] Website: www.aiaiowa.org


1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Document 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”B. Document 00 52 13 “Agreement Forms – AIA A101-2017”C. Document 00 55 00 “Notice to Proceed”D. Document 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance” – (A310-2010, A312-2010, G715-1991)E. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions – AIA A201-2017”F. Document 00 91 13 “Addenda”

1.5 MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. These Supplemental Conditions include modifications as agreed to and recommended by the Iowa Construction Industry Forum (ICIF) which is a partnership among the Iowa Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Iowa), the American Council of Engineering Companies of Iowa (ACEC / Iowa), and the Master Builders of Iowa (MBI). These changes generally address concerns with how the A201 relates to the Code of Iowa and common construction practices in Iowa.






SECTION 00 73 00SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS


B. AIA A201 – 2007 COVER PAGE1. The “Project”, the “Owner”, and the “Architect” shall be as identified on Document 00 01

01 “Title Sheet”.

C. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS1. Add the following sentence to subparagraph 1.1.1 The Contract Documents

a. The Contract Documents shall also include the following:1) .1 Document 00 51 00 “Notice of Intent to Award”2) .2 Document 00 55 00 “Notice to Proceed”3) .3 Document 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance”4) .4 Document 00 65 83 “Contractor’s Certificates”

2. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 1.1.4 The Projecta. .1 The Project may include Work by the Owner or Work by Others for the Owner

as set out in Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”. Such additional Work shall be coordinated and scheduled by the Contractor as to properly integrate into the Work of the Contract.

3. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 1.1.5 The Drawings.a. 1.1.5.1 Throughout the Specifications and Drawings the word “shall” denotes

mandatory, the word “may” denotes permissive.b. 1.1.5.2 A cash “allowance” is a stipulated amount to be included in the Bid to

account for items as described in Section 01 21 00 “Allowances”, if included. This amount shall be applied in whole, or in part, or not applied at the discretion of the Owner after execution of the contract. Unused allowances in whole, or in part, shall be credited back to the Owner by means of Change Order at Project closeout.

c. 1.1.5.3 “Install” shall mean install only materials, components or equipment furnished by others. Materials. Components or equipment shall be received at the Site, unloaded, stored, protected, and installed in place, including final connections.

d. 1.1.5.4 “Furnish” shall mean furnish only. Materials, components or equipment shall be ordered, purchased, and delivered to the Site to be received by others. Installation will be by others as assigned.

e. 1.1.5.5 “Provide” shall mean furnish and install complete, in place and ready for use.

f. 1.1.5.6 See Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project” for further definitions regarding assignment of work and work restrictions.

g. 1.1.5.7 The Drawings are enumerated and identified in Document 00 01 15 “List of Drawings”.

4. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 1.1.6 The Specificationsa. 1.1.6.1 The Specifications are enumerated and identified in Document 00 01 10

“Table of Contents”3. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract

Documents.b. 1.2.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS

1) .1 Because of the small scale of Drawings, efforts have been made to show details in larger scales to facilitate the interpretation of the Architect’s and Engineer’s intent. Should any discrepancies be encountered within the Contract Documents, they will take precedence in the following order:a) Written Addenda, Contract and Change Orders over Specificationsb) Specifications and Drawings are to be considered equal.c) Within the Drawings: Large scale details over small scale details;

noted materials over those indicated; noted dimensions over those scaled; and scheduled materials over those detailed.

2) .2 In general the Specifications are divided according to Divisions and Sections. However, the Prime Contractor is responsible for specific




delegation of all phases of the Work to the various Subcontractors. If the Prime Contractor has any doubt as to the intention of the Architect, he shall immediately notify the Architect. Additional written interpretation or information will be given along with necessary details. The affected portion of the Work to be continued only after clarification. No change in Contract Sum will be allowed for failure to notify the Architect of discrepancies found during the Bidding period.

3) .3 The Specifications, in their entirety, are an integral part of the Drawings. Any structural or finish item shown on the Drawings but not described within the Specifications shall become a part of the Specifications and vise-versa. It is also to be understood that the materials, details, construction, and finishes specified shall be furnished and applied to all similar portions of the Work, whether they are specifically shown and noted or not.

4. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Servicec. 1.5.3 The Architect’s and Engineer’s Seal shall not extend to versions of Drawings,

Specifications and other Documents provided on electronic media. The Architect’s seal, and those of his Consultants, shall be limited to hard copy versions of such material, bearing original seal and signature.

d. 1.5.4 Materials on electronic media, if so provided, are provided as a convenience only. No warranty or guarantee is expressed or implied as to the accuracy of material on electronic media or to it’s suitability for any particular purpose. It shall be the responsibility of the user to verify consistency of information between versions of material on electronic media and that on hard copy bearing original seal and signature.

D. ARTICLE 2 OWNER1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 2.2 Information and Services Required of

the Ownera. 2.2.6 Prior to the commencement of the Work under the Contract, the Owner shall

obtain all lands, easements and rights-of-way including variances and/or zoning modifications necessary the execution and completion of the Work under this Contract and provide evidence of same to the Architect.

2. Add the following paragraph to Article 2 Ownera. 2.5 EXTRA SERVICES OF THE ARCHITECT

1) 2.5.1 If Substantial Completion exceeds the date set forth by the Bidding and Contract Documents and the Agreement beyond thirty days, the Owner shall be responsible to reimburse the Architect for his extended services. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner accordingly.

2) 2.5.2 Extra Services of the Architect will be charged as follows::a) Principal Architect $220.00 / hr.b) Senior Architect $185.00 / hr.c) Architect $140.00 / hr.d) Graduate Architect $110.00 / hr.e) Draftsman / CAD Technician $100.00 / hr.f) Secretarial / Clerical $ 65.00 / hr.g) Mileage $ 00.535 / mileh) Meals and Lodging At cost incurredi) Architect’s Consultants 1.15 times invoice to the

Architect3) 2.5.3 Cost for additional services of the Architect, if required, will be

deducted from the Contractor’s Final Request for Payment.E. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR

1. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 3.2.2




a. 3.2.2.1 Before ordering any material or before performing any Work, each Contractor and Subcontractor shall verify Drawing dimensions by field measurements at the site and be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra compensation shall be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and the dimensions shown on the drawings due to the Contractor’s failure to verify dimensions. Any difference which is found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration prior to proceeding with the Work.

b. 3.2.2.2 In the event a discrepancy is discovered after award of the Contract and prior to commencing the effected Work, it shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Contractor shall be deemed to have established his Contract Sum as follows:1) Discrepancies between the Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications

shall govern.2) Discrepancies between the Drawings and Schedules, the Schedules shall

govern.3) Discrepancies between Drawings of different scale, the larger scale Drawing

shall govern.4) Materials not described in the Specifications but shown on the Drawings, the

Drawings shall govern.5) Discrepancies between the Manufacturer’s published installation instructions

and the Project Specifications the Manufacturer’s published instructions shall govern.

6) General Conditions including modifications and supplemental paragraphs shall govern over technical Specifications.

2. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 3.3 Supervision and Construction Proceduresa. 3.3.4 The Prime Contractors and Subcontractors shall meet, when requested and

at regular intervals, with the Owner and the Architect. The purpose of such meetings are to review project schedule, to consider possible changes and/or additions to the Work, and to coordinate construction activities with the Owner’s use and occupancy.

b. 3.3.5 Project Meetings shall be held and scheduled as agreed at the Pre-Construction Conference and/or as follows:1) .1 Pre-Construction Conference to be held prior to site mobilization and

commencement of the Work to identify key personnel and communication protocol. The Contractor’s use of site and the Owner’s use and occupancy will be reviewed.

2) .2 Regular monthly on site Construction Meetings will be held including Prime Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate to the progress of the Work, the Architect, the Engineer and the Owner. The meeting shall deal with the project schedule, coordination, review of pay requests, and review of proposed modifications and change orders.

3) .3 Weekly Prime Contractors and Subcontractors coordination meetings.4) .4 Pre-installation Conferences prior to the installation of major components,

equipment or systems.5) .5 Each Project meeting shall be presided over by the General Contractor or

the Architect. Meeting minutes shall be recorded, distributed and reviewed, and approved at subsequent meetings.

3. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.4 Labor and Materialsa. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 3.4.3

1) 3.4.3.1 The Owner’s existing facility and site is designated a no smoking facility by policy. Smoking will not be permitted by construction personnel within the existing building or on site at any time.




2) 3.4.3.2 The conduct, behavior and language of construction personnel is expected to be of the highest professional level. Coarse or offensive behavior or language will not be tolerated.

3) 3.4.3.3 Contractors shall monitor posters, calendars and promotional material for graphic content. Offensive graphic or pictorial material will not be tolerated within the construction area.

4) 3.4.3.4 All construction personnel shall maintain proper clothing attire when working within the existing buildings or enclosed new construction. Shirts shall be worn at all times when working within the existing buildings or enclosed new construction.

5) 3.4.3.5 The Owner reserves the right to have any personnel or material removed from the site after proper notice, which he judges offensive or does not comply with the above.

b. 3.4.4 Under terms of this agreement, each prime Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for furnishing and installing all required materials and labor, including any portion subcontracted and shall coordinate same for a complete and operable facility.

c. 3.4.5 The division or sections of the Drawings and Specifications are not intended to limit the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors.

d. 3.4.6 The Contractor shall maintain equal opportunity policies of employment as follows:1) .1 Contractor and Contractor’s subcontractors shall not discriminate against

any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training including apprenticeship. Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of nondiscrimination.

2) .2 Contractor and Contractor’s subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.

e. 3.4.7 The Owner, or his representatives, will not undertake to settle any differences between the Contractor or his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.

f. 3.4.8 The building site shall, in general, be in charge of the Owner. The Contractor will be responsible for the Work area from the time the site is turned over to him until the Work of this Contract is completed and accepted. All Contractors shall additionally clean up all refuse, rubbish, and scrap materials of every nature resulting from his operations and to endeavor to keep site in a neat orderly condition at all times.

g. 3.4.9 Criminal background checks / sex offender registry:1) .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting a criminal

background check with the Iowa and other state Sex Offender Registry as to all persons working on District property on in District buildings. This includes all employees of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, all independent contractors, casual laborers, workers obtained through union halls or hiring halls, and all other individuals present on District property at any time during the performance of the Contract. No person shall be permitted to work on District property who has been convicted of a felony or




who is on the Sex Offender Registry for any State. The Contractor must have records available for the District to inspect upon request to verify that background/sex offender checks have been performed on all persons working on District property. The District reserves the right to order the Contractor to remove any person from the District's work who the District determines to be a threat to safety of students, District employees, other workers, parents, visitors, or otherwise. All workers must follow District regulations and rules as to building access and security.

h. 3.4.10 Davis Bacon and Equal Opportunity Employment1) .1 The project financing does not include funds such that it is subject to the

provisions of State and Federal Davis Bacon Wage Determinations. However State and Federal Equal Opportunity Regulations remain applicable.

i. 3.4.11 Debarment and / or Suspension: Not Applicable4. Add to following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.5 Warranty

a. 3.5.1 In addition to and above warranties as provided by various materials and systems, manufacturers on individual component items, the prime contractor and thru him, his subcontractors, shall provide the Owner a correction period in accordance with paragraph 12.2.2 for a period of one year on all work included in the contract. The one year correction period shall be provided for all work in whole or in part as defined by the Substantial Completion Certificate and beginning at the date identified therein.1) .1 During the one year correction period the Contractor shall be obligated to

promptly complete, correct, repair or replace all defects in materials, equipment or workmanship identified during the warranty period.

2) .2 All items included in the scope of the work but found to be incomplete subsequent to final payment shall be completed by the contractor regardless of whether it is discovered within the warranty period or not. Failure to identify incomplete items at final inspection does not relieve the contractor of his obligation to complete unfinished work.

3) .3 Normal scheduled maintenance procedures shall be excluded from the one year repair and correction period.

b. 3.5.2 Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Exclusion Statement:1) .1 At project closeout the Contractor shall provide written certification to the

Owner that to his knowledge, he nor any of his Subcontractors or Suppliers provided or installed any materials or equipment containing asbestos or hazardous materials.

5. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.6 Taxesa. 3.6.1 Pursuant to Iowa Code 423.3(31a) and 423.3(80) the Owner complies

with the requirements as an exempt entity, and as such is not required to pay Iowa State Sales Tax on goods or services purchased for the Contract. THE BIDDER SHALL NOT INCLUDE IOWA STATE SALES TAX IN THE AMOUNT OF HIS BID OR ANY ALTERNATES THERETO.

b. 3.6.2 Sales Tax and Tax Refunds: (if applicable)Sales Tax Exemption Certificate: As an exempt entity, the Owner, will register the Project as exempt with the Iowa Department of Revenue & Finance. The Owner will then provide each contractor/subcontractor with an authorization letter and exemption certificate which will allow the purchase of materials from suppliers without tax.1) More information on this process along with example documents is available

at the Iowa Department of Revenue & Finance website at http://www.state.ia.us/tax/business/contr-ExEnt.html




6. 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices, and Compliance with Laws. Modify paragraph 3.7.5 as recommended by the ICIF by adding underlined words, so that the section now reads as follows:a. 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the General Contractor knowingly encounters

and recognizes human remains, burial markers, archeological sites or previously undelineated wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence or good faith belief of such existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

7. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.9 Superintendenta. 3.9.4 The Contractor shall maintain a full-time, on-site superintendent at all times

when work is being performed or materials received.b. 3.9.5 The low bidder and prospective contractor shall identify his intended

superintendent and those of his mechanical and electrical subcontractors. The Owner reserves the right to examine the credentials of proposed superintendents and reject those judged not in the owner’s best interest. The contractor shall provide a superintendent acceptable to the Owner.

c. 3.9.6 The Contractor shall not change superintendent personnel without written notice to / and agreement of the Architect and Owner. Replacement supervisory personnel shall be fully briefed by the departing superintendent and all project documents and logs shall be transferred.

d. 3.9.7 The Contractor shall be responsible to receive all deliveries at the site. The Owner and his personnel will not accept receipt of deliveries in the absence of the Contractor’s personnel.

8. 3.10 Contractor’s Construction Schedules. Modify paragraph 3.10.2 as recommended by the ICIF by deleting the last sentence, so that the section now reads as follows:a. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule promptly after being

awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) all the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

9. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.10 Contractor’s Construction Schedulesa. 3.10.4 The Contractor’s schedule shall be updated and distributed at each monthly

construction meeting at a minimum.b. 3.10.5 The Contractor’s construction schedule shall include information provided

by the Owner relative to Work by Owner or separate contractors per Article 6.c. 3.10.6 It shall be understood by the Contractor that the date of beginning and the

time for completion as specified in the Contract Documents of the Work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of the Contract; and it is to be further understood and agreed that the Work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the "Notice to Proceed" and that the Project shall be substantially completed as per Agreement. Substantial Completion shall be described as the level of completion such that the Owner can utilize the portion of the Substantially Completed area for its original planned purpose.




.1 Liquidated Damages: See Article 9 paragraph 9.11

.2 Failure to complete Critical Activities, as established in the Construction Schedule, will be grounds for withholding payment until such time as the Contractor shall demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Architect, his ability to return to the established schedule..3 Contractors are advised that timely completion of the Project as scheduled will be of paramount importance in consideration of Bids and evaluation of performance. The Owner will implement remedies as reserved by Contract to promote timely completion. A deviation of greater than two weeks from the approved Project Schedule shall result in the Contractor submitting a plan of correction to make up lost time to the satisfaction of the Owner. .4 Contractors are further advised a deviation greater than three weeks from approved Project Schedule, not otherwise agreed to by the Owner via Change Order, may initiate notice to the surety. Additional delay without effort to correct or make up lost time may result in the owner invoking his bonding protection as reserved by Contract Documents.

d. 3.10.8 Extra services of the Architect due to the Contractor exceeding the completion date will be reimbursed to the Owner per paragraph 2.5.

10. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samplesa. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 3.12.4

.1 The Contractor shall not submit shop drawings for materials and equipment not specified or approved. Materials and equipment intended for use that was not specified or granted prior approval shall be first proposed as a substitution and if accepted processed as a change order..2 The Contractor shall highlight or otherwise demark variations on the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents necessary due to the use of an approved substitution. The Contractor shall also identify adjustments necessary to adjacent work or work of other trades made necessary by the use of approved substitutions.

b. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 3.12.7.1 The Architect/Engineer shall review shop drawings for conformance with design intent per Drawings and conformance with material specification. The Contractor shall remain responsible for dimensions and quantities, for temporary provisions and for means and methods. Notations on shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer regarding these items are an aid to the Contractor only and shall not cause the Architect/Engineer to assume responsibility for same.

11. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.13 Use of Sitea. 3.13.1 Responsibility for Premises:

The Prime Contractors will be responsible for all areas that require Work under this Contract from the time the area is turned over to him, until the Work of this Contract is accepted. He shall coordinate his access with the Owner's representative. The adjacent existing facility will be open and occupied during normal working hours.

b. 3.13.2 See Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work” for further definition of Contractor’s responsibility for site and premises.

c. 3.13.3 Storm Water Pollution Protection and Erosion Control (All Contractors).1 The Project and it’s implementation shall be in accordance with all Federal, State and Local rules, ordinances and requirements with regard to prevention of water pollution. This includes the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (FWPCA) of 1972 as amended in 1990 and 1992 and all subsequent regulations established by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Iowa Department of Natural Resources (IDNR) and applicable Local ordinances. The Contractor shall be




responsible to implement the project in accordance with these rules and shall include the cost of same in the BASE BID..2 The Project may qualify under the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Phase II Program MS4s Cities and will be under a General Permit No. 2 “Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Sites”.

a. If required, The Owner will be responsible to file Public Notice, to File Notice of Intent, to pay the Permit Fee and to File Notice of Discontinuation at the earliest opportunity. The Owner will Certify to the Contractor his responsibilities under the Permit and his assignment of those responsibilities to the Contractor.

b. If required, the Contractor shall be responsible to implement the Project in full compliance of the General Permit No. 2 and shall include the cost of same within the BASE BID.

c. The Contractor shall certify to the Owner his acknowledgement of the requirements of General Permit No. 2 and his acceptance of assignment for compliance.

d. The Contractor shall require of all Subcontractors and Suppliers who may contribute to Water Pollution in any way while performing work under the Contract, to similarly certify to the Contractor and through him to the Owner his acknowledgement of the requirements of General Permit No. 2 and his acceptance of assignment for compliance.

.3 The full document NPDES General Permit No. 2 “Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Sites may be obtained from the Iowa Department of Natural Resources as follows:

Iowa Department of Natural ResourcesStorm Water Coordinator502 East 9th StreetDes Moines, Iowa 50319-0034Program Coordinator: Joe GriffinPhone: 515-281-70717Website: http://www.iowadnr.com/water/strormwater/index.html

12. Add the following sub paragraphs to paragraph 3.14 Cutting and Patchinga. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 3.14.1

.1 Cutting and patching shall be kept to the minimum which will allow the proper placement of the materials. Unauthorized and/or careless cutting will not be tolerated. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and making good thereafter as may be necessary for the performance of the Work under his Contract, or for the proper connection of Work under the different sections of his Contract. No such cutting shall impair the strength of any part of the building. Unless noted otherwise in the Specifications or Drawings, each Contractor shall properly place in the slabs, walls, etc., during construction the necessary anchors, inserts, sleeves, and hangers, chases, etc., required for the installation of the materials for his Contract..2 Cutting and patching required shall be the responsibility of such respective Subcontractors / Contractors. No cutting or drilling shall be done without coordination with the General Contractor. No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be done without approval of the Owner's representative, Architect, and if required, Engineer. .3 Workmen employed to do the patchwork shall be workmen skilled in the particular trade, or trades involved. The quality of the workmanship must be the best and the Work shall restore the structure and surfaces to new condition to match the existing adjoining Work, using materials and methods consistent with the requirements of these Contract Documents.

http://www.iowadnr.com/water/strormwater/index.html




13. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 3.15 Cleaning Upa. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 3.15.1

.1 Each Contractor shall, not less than once each week, remove all waste materials and rubbish from the building site..2 The Contractor shall, once each day, sweep the Work area to a broom-clean condition..3 Failure to comply to this standard of cleanliness will be grounds for the Owner to have the building and site cleaned and charge the cost to the Contractors as provided in this Article.

b. 3.15.3 At completion of the Work and before acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall give the building area a thorough cleaning, removing all construction dust. (See Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout”)

c. 3.15.4 At the completion of the Work and before acceptance and final payment, each Contractor shall restore and / or replace, in a suitable manner, all public and private site property which has been damaged or removed in the performance of this Contract. Site property include portions of any and all structures, and adjacent portions of streets, alleys, lawns, side-walks, paving or property used in executing the Work.

d. 3.15.5 Finish items including floors, walls, ceilings, doors and hardware, glass, fixtures and lamps, metal surfaces, woodwork, and decorations, as required in the Work, shall be cleaned, foreign matter removed, polished, waxed and touch-up painted as may normally be required for the finished item. The Contractor installing the item shall clean it, at a minimum, just before Substantial Completion.

F. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 4.1 General.

a. 4.1.4 Architect’s Construction Administration Services:The Architect’s Construction Administration Services are as determined by the Owner / Architect Agreement. The Architect’s Administration of the Contract as described in paragraph 4.2 below shall apply only if the Owner / Architect Agreement includes Construction Administration Services.

2. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 4.1.2.a. .1 The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to

the Architect for site visits made necessary by the fault of the Contractor or by defects and deficiencies in the Work or by extended completion time not the result of increased scope or other action of the Owner.

3. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 4.2.7a. 4.2.7.1 In no case will the Architect’s review period on any submittal be less than 3

days after receipt of the submittal from the Contractor.

G. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS – No Modifications or Additions

H. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY THE OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTOR – No Modifications or Additions

I. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 7.1 General.

a. 7.1.4 The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner for a change in the Work shall be based on the following schedule..1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the General Contractor’s own forces, 15 percent (15%) of the cost..2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractors, 5 percent (5%) of the amount due to the Subcontractor..3 For each Subcontractor involved, for the Work performed by that




Subcontractor’s own forces, 15 percent (15%) of the cost..4 For each Subcontractor involved, for the Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Subcontractors, 5 percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor..5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Section 7.3.7..6 Changes in the Work involving credits for Work not performed shall be made on the basis of total cost. Contractor mark-up for overhead and profit shall be included in the construction cost change..7 In order to facilitate checking for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials, and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $ 5,000.00 be approved without such itemization.

J. ARTICLE 8 TIME1. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 8.2 Progress and Completion.

a. 8.2.4 Unless otherwise noted the Date of Substantial Completion shall be as indicated in Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”, Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders” and / or Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”.

b. 8.2.5 Completion: Timely completion of the Project, as scheduled, is of paramount importance in evaluation of performance. The Owner will implement remedies as reserved by Contract to promote timely completion. A deviation of greater than two weeks from the approved Project Schedule shall result in the Contractor submitting a plan of correction to make up lost time to the satisfaction of the Owner. A deviation greater than three weeks from the approved Project Schedule, not otherwise agreed to by the Owner via Change Order, may initiate notice to the Surety Company. Additional delay without effort to correct or make up lost time may result in the Owner invoking his Bonding Protection as reserved by the Contract Documents, which may include augmenting the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s forces, or replacing the Contractor and / or his Subcontractors.

c. 8.2.6 Liquidated Damages: There are no Liquidated Damages scheduled for this Project.

K. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION1. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 9.2 Schedule of Values

a. 9.2.1 The Contractor shall submit the Project’s Schedule of Values within 15 days of Notice of Award on the latest version of either hard copy or electronic version of AIA Form G702-1992 and continuation sheet G703-1992.

b. .9.2.2 The Schedule of Values shall have sufficient break down and line items to allow assessment of progress and payment for the work accomplished in each line item which may progress at different rates. The Schedule of Values shall at a minimum include separate line items for labor and materials for each specification division listed in the Project Manual index. Separate line items for material and labor may allow separate payment for material delivered but not yet incorporated into the Work.

2. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 9.3.1a. .3 Applications for Payment for the preceding month are to be submitted to the

Architect no later than the first working day of each month, unless otherwise agreed to at the Pre-Construction Conference.

b. .4 Applications for Payment are to be submitted to the Architect in triplicate on the latest version of either hard copy or electronic version of AIA Form G702 and 703 in the same format as the Schedule of Values.




c. .5 Applications for Payment shall include Five Percent (5%) Retainage on the entire contract amount, until reduction in retainage is agreed to, and shall be distributed to the listed line items.

3. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 9.3.2a. .1 Requests for payment for materials or equipment stored off site shall be

accompanied buy documentation establishing ownership by the Owner, shipping manifest establishing inventory, and evidence of insurance on the Owner’s behalf at the location of storage.

4. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 9.3.3a. .1 Lien Waivers: The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect,

satisfactory lien waivers from major suppliers and Subcontractors before requesting 95% level of payment from the Architect for each line item on Applications for Payment.

5. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 9.3 Applications for Paymenta. 9.3.4 Reduction and or Payment of Retainage, if any shall be as follows:

.1 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage shall be included only after prior notice, discussion and agreement with Owner and Architect/Engineer..2 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage as agreed shall be accompanied by “Consent of Surety for Payment or Partial Payment of Retainage”..3 Requests for payment or reduction of retainage shall be accompanied by an executed lien waiver from the Subcontractor and/or Supplier on whose behalf payment is being requested..4 Request for payment or reduction of retainage may be subject to Statutory Law and be payable only after acceptance by resolution of the Board and passage of the statutory 30 day period for claims by Subcontractors and Suppliers.

6. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION. Modify paragraph 9.5.3 as recommended by the ICIF by deleting it in it’s entirety:a. 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section

9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at it’s sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and any Subcontractor or material or equipment supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint checks, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment.

7. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS. Modify paragraph 9.6.4 as recommended by the ICIF by deleting the first two sentences so that the paragraph now reads as follows:a. 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that

the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as otherwise may be required by law.

8. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 9.8.3.a. .1 The Architect will perform no more than two (2) inspections to determine

whether the Work or designated portion thereof has attained Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections.

9. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 9.10.1.




a. .1 The Architect will perform no more than two (2) inspections to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof has attained Final Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections.

10. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 9.10.2a. .1 The Owner shall retain five (5%) percent of the amount of each payment as

retainage until final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by Contract Documents. Final payment will be made at expiration of thirty (30) days after completion and final acceptance of the Project, provided no Claims have been filed with the Owner. If at the end of said thirty (30) day period, Claims are on file for labor performed or materials furnished in performance of this Contract, the Owner will continue to retain from unpaid funds a sum not less than triple the total amount of Claims. If unpaid funds are insufficient to satisfy Claims, Claimant shall have the right to judgment on the bond given for performance of the Contract as provided in the Code of Iowa.

b. .2 The Contractor will indemnify and save the Owner and the Architect or their agents harmless from all Claims growing out of the lawful demand for payment by Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material suppliers, and furnisher of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, tools, and all supplies, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall, at the Owner’s request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature designated above have been paid, discharged, or waived.

c. .3 Lien Waivers for previous payments may be required for all progress payments, but as a minimum shall be submitted with the Request for Final Payment.

d. .4 Request for Final Payment shall be accompanied by Consent of Surety for Final Payment.

11. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 9.10.5a. .1 The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate as

a release to the Owner of all Claims and all liability to the Contractor other than Claims in stated amounts as may be specifically accepted by the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work and for every act and neglect of the Owner and others relating to or arising out of this Work. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligation under the Contract Documents or the Performance Bond and Payment Bonds.

12. Add the following Paragraphs to Article Payments and Completion.a. 9.11 Liquidated Damages: The Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any,

shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner sums hereafter stipulated as liquidated damages, and not as penalty, for each calendar day of delay after the date established for Substantial Completion in the Contract Documents until the Work is substantially complete: zero per calendar day ($ 0.00 / calendar day).

b. 9.12 Bonus: The Owner shall pay as bonus to the Contractor a sum of zero dollars ($ 0.00) for each calendar day preceding the date established for Substantial Completion in the Contract Documents that the Work is determined to be Substantially Complete by the Architect.

L. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY1. Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property

a. 10.2.9 All parts of the Work shall be braced to resist wind or other loads. The Contractor shall perform the Work with the explicit understanding that the design of the Project is based on all parts of the Work having been completed and as such, the methods of performance of each part of Work shall be done accordingly.




b. 10.2.10 Temporary items such as, but not limited to, scaffolding, staging, lifting and hoisting devices, shoring, excavation barricades, and safety and construction procedures necessary in completion of the Project shall be the responsibility of the Contractors and their Subcontractors and shall comply with all applicable OSHA code and regulations. It shall not be the responsibility of the Owner or his representative to determine if the Contractors, Subcontractors, their representatives are in compliance with the aforementioned regulations.

c. 10.2.11 If in the performance of the Work, the Contractor encounters or uncovers hazardous materials that have not be rendered harmless, the Contractor shall cease Work in the effected area and notify the Architect and Owner in writing.

d. 10.2.12 The Contractor shall maintain and keep clear all required fire exits both within new construction areas and within existing buildings. The Contractor shall also maintain adjacent site areas to extend exit ways to public street or right-of-way and to allow access by emergency equipment.

M. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS1. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance.

a. 11.1.5 See Document 00 61 00 for specific requirements and limits for Contractor’s Liability Insurance.

2. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 11.2 Owner’s Liability Insurance.a. 11.2.1 See Document 00 61 00 for specific requirements and limits for Owner’s

Liability Insurance.3. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph11.3 Property Insurance

a. 11.3.11 See Document 00 61 00 for specific requirements and limits for Owner’s Property Insurance.

4. Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bonda. 11.4.3 See Document 00 61 00 for specific requirements and amounts for

Performance Bond and Payment Bond, if required.

N. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK1. Add the following subparagraph to subparagraph 12.2.2

a. 4. Upon request by the Owner and prior to the expiration of one year from the date of Substantial Completion, the Architect will conduct and the Contractor shall attend a meeting with the Owner to review the facility operations and performance.

O. ARTICLE 13 MICELLANEOUS PROVISIONS1. 13.1 GOVERNING LAW. Modify paragraph 13.1 as recommended by the ICIF by

deleting the words following “where the project is located”, so that the section now reads as follows: a. 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the project is

located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as a method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

2. 13.7 TIME LIMIT ON CLAIMS. Modify paragraph 13.7 as recommended by the ICIF by striking it in it’s entirety and substitute the following: a. 13.7 The Owner and the Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of

action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and the Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with 13.7.




b. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitation shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion;.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all event not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to the acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, which ever comes first.

3. Add the following paragraph to Article 13a. 13.8 Branding: The Contractor and their subcontractors or suppliers shall NOT be

permitted to permanently brand their work by attachment or embedment of plaques, logos, or permanent signage. Temporary identification signs shall be removed no later then 30 days subsequent to Substantial Completion.

P. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT – No Modifications or Additions

Q. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES1. Add the following subparagraphs to subparagraph 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time.

a. .3 Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances that form the basis of the claim, the date upon which each cause for delay began to effect the progress of the Work, the date upon each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days’ increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of such cause of delay. The Contractor shall provide such supporting documentation as the Owner may require including, where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activities affected by the circumstances forming the basis of the Claim.

b. .4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of a number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor.








DIVISION 00 - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENT 00 91 13ADDENDA


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PURPOSE:A. Please note: This space is reserved for all written and graphic instructions issued during the

bidding period, and prior to execution of an Agreement, to extend, clarify, revise, supplement, or delete information in the original Bidding Documents and Contract Documents as issued or in previous Addenda.

B. The clarifications, modifications, deletions and/or additions contained in Addenda shall take precedent over drawings, specifications and previously issued addenda. All requirements of the originally issued Bidding and Contract Documents or previous Addenda, which are not specifically altered by subsequent Addenda, shall remain in full force and effect.

C. Portions of the Addendum affecting the Contract Documents will be incorporated into the Contract by enumeration of the Addendum in the Owner/Contractor Agreement.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:A. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Forms”: Acknowledge the receipt of AddendaB. Document 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”: Identification of Accepted AlternatesC. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions - AIA A201-2007”.D. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”

1.3 ADDENDA ISSUANCE RECORD:A. Contractor to Record Addenda as issued during the course of the Bid Period.B. Contractor to acknowledge receipt of all Addenda as issued on Document 00 41 13 “Bid Form”C. Addenda Issuance Record:

1. Addendum # Issuance Date:








DOCUMENT 00 91 13ADDENDA



DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 01 11 00SUMMARY OF PROJECT

(Single Prime Contract)

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 11 13 “Notice of Letting”b. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”c. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”: Site Survey, Geotechnical

Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report.d. Section 00 51 00 “Notice of Award”: Identification of accepted alternates.e. Section 00 52 13 “Agreement Forms”: Accepted Alternates & Adjustments.f. Section 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance”g. Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions, A.I.A. Document A201 – 2007”h. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”i. Section 00 91 13 “Addenda”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes

1. Work definitions.2. Hazardous Materials Exclusion.3. Project Scope, Single Contract, Project Description of Work.4. Temporary facilities and services.5. Work by the Owner

a. Work by the Owner’s own forces.b. Work by Others for the Owner

6. Contractor’s use of site and premises.a. Maintain Emergency Access

7. Owner occupancy.a. Maintain Exiting

8. Protection of Persons and Property9. Simultaneous Use and Occupancy – Coordination of Activities10. Site Authority11. Sequence of Work12. Project Phasing13. Project Dates (Schedule).14. Work Classifications

B. Related Requirements1. All Pre-Specification Sections beginning “00___” and Division 1 apply to this Section.2. Section 01 21 00 “Allowances”3. Section 01 22 00 “Measurement and Payment (Unit Prices)”4. Section 01 23 00 “Alternates”5. Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements” 6. Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspecting Services”7. Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION1. See Document 00 01 01 “Title Sheet”




1.4 WORK DEFINITIONS A. Work is labeled on the Drawings by assignment to individual Subcontractors or to Owner as

follows:1. “G.C.” or “Gen. Contr.” - refers to the General Contractor or his Subcontractors and/or

Suppliers. 2. “M.C.” or “Mech. Contr.” - Refers to the Mechanical Contractor or his Subcontractors

and/or Suppliers.3. “E.C.” or “Elec. Contr.” - Refers to the Electrical Contractor or his Subcontractors and/or

Suppliers.4. “B.O.” or “By Owner” - refers to Work, materials or equipment provided by the Owner or

his separate Contractors.5. “B.O.” or By Others” - refers to Work shown on a particular Drawing or detail that is

specifically excluded from the Work for whom that Drawing or detail was intended, but which may require coordination.

6. “N.I.C.” or “Not in Contract” - refers to Work materials, equipment or furnishings specifically excluded from the Contract as that to be provided by the Owner or Owner’s agents.

7. “Furnish” shall mean “furnish only”. Materials or items shall be ordered, purchased, delivered to the site and unloaded by the Contractor. Installation will be by persons other than the Contractor.

8. “Install” shall mean “install only” materials furnished by others. Materials shall be received at the Site, unloaded, stored, protected, and installed in place, including final connections.

9. “Provide” means “furnish and install” complete, in place and ready for use.10. “Shall” denotes mandatory.11. “May” denotes permissive.

B. In general all Work, labor, materials, equipment and incidentals described by Specifications and shown on the Drawings shall be provided by the specific Contractor assigned, as below, unless specifically excluded or assigned to others.

1.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EXCLUSION – Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM)A. Removal or encapsulation of asbestos is specifically excluded from the Work under this

Contract. If, during execution of the Work, the need for removal or encapsulation of asbestos is encountered or suspected, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and Architect, in writing. No Claim for delay, resulting from the Contractor’s failure to promptly notify the Owner will be honored.

B. Refer to Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions”, Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” and Section 01 77 00 “Contractor Certificates” for Contractor’s Statement of Certification concerning non-use of asbestos or asbestos containing materials or equipment.

C. In general within the existing building, the Contractor shall be responsible for removal of all existing flooring and substrate preparation for all areas scheduled to receive new flooring. Previous projects have removed all known asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) including Vinyl Asbestos Tile (VAT). If, in the performance of the Work, ACBM is discovered or suspected, the Contractor shall stop work and notify the Owner. If testing by the Owner confirms the presence of ACBM, the Owner shall legally remove same through the work of others outside this Contract in a manner respecting the Contractor’s schedule.

1.6 LEAD PAINT:A. The Project may include work that may disturb existing lead paint. The Contractor shall perform

such work in accordance with state and local ordinances with trained and certified personnel.B. See Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements” relating to Lead Paint:

1. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: a. Chapters 661–69, 661-70 relating to Lead Paint.




1.7 PROJECT SCOPE, SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT, COMPETITIVE STIPULATED SUMA. Division 01 “General Requirements”: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.B. General Description – Base Bid:

1. Base Bid:a. The Base Bid shall consist of equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance

Vestibules, and additional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rogers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School, and Support Services Center / MLA.

2. Access Control Alternates:a. AC-#01: Add to the Base Bid equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance

Vestibules, and additional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Miller Middle School and Marshalltown High School.

b. AC-#02: Add to the Base Bid equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Lenihan Intermediate School

3. Video Surveillance Alternates:a. VS-#01: Add to the Base Bid new or additional video surveillance system

components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rogers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School

b. VS-#02: Add to the Base Bid new or additional video surveillance system components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Lenihan Intermediate School and Support Services Center / MLA.ALLOWANCES: (See also Section 01 21 00 – Allowances) N/A

1.8 ALLOWANCES:A. See Section 01 21 00 – Allowances for Allowances relating to the Work of this Section to be

included in the Base Bid.

1.9 UNIT PRICES: (See also Section 01 22 00 – Measurement and Payment (Unit Prices)A. As Required for Time and Materials Change Orders

1.10 ALTERNATES: (See also Section 01 23 00 – Alternates)A. See Section 01 23 00 Alternates for Alternates relating to the Work of this Section.

1.11 TEMPORARY SERVICES AND CONTROLSA. In addition to the Scope of Work as described above, the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors

shall be responsible for Temporary Facilities and Controls as assigned by Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”.

B. Contractor shall endeavor to isolate, control and contain all noise, dust, debris and disturbance produced by construction activities from the occupied existing building and site.1. Contractor to erect and maintain temporary dust, and noise barriers, safety barricades

and warning devices as required and as shown as a minimum.




2. Contractor shall schedule Work, and provide temporary facilities as to minimize disturbance by construction activities to the Owner’s continued occupancy of existing building and site.

1.12 LAW AND REGUALTIONA. The Contractor shall manage and conduct the Work in accordance with all applicable local,

state and federal laws and regulations, including notices, inspections and permits, per Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”.

B. The Contractor shall manage and conduct the Work in accordance with all applicable rules and regulations, of Utility Companies serving the facility, per Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”.

1.13 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering

with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. B. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work to provide for and facilitate separate

work by the Owner or by Others for the Owner at the Project.C. See schedule of Work by Owner or by Others for the Owner at the end of this Section.

1.14 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE AND PREMISESA. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.B. Limit use of site and premises to allow:

1. Owner occupancy of adjacent existing buildings, parking areas and roadways, maintaining all emergency and normal access and fire exits.

2. Continued use of adjacent right of ways by the public.C. Coordinate use of site and premises and interruption to services under direction of Owner.D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Limit number and duration of interruptions to building security,

fire protection, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, and similar services to absolute minimum and coordinate all interruptions in services with the Owner when they can occur. No utility outages without this coordination.

E. The Contractor shall limit site access, storage and staging area to that shown on the Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Owner and agreed at the Pre-construction Conference.

1.15 OWNER OCCUPANCYA. There will be simultaneous owner occupancy in adjacent areas of the building.

1. The adjacent portions of the Building(s) will be occupied for maintenance operations from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm weekdays throughout the period of construction.

2. The adjacent portions of the School Building(s) will be minimally occupied for operations from the first week of June thru the second week of August.

3. The Contractor will coordinate with the Owner for special scheduled events.4. The Contractor shall maintain emergency access, emergency exiting with pedestrian

protection and walkway as required during occupied periods.B. The contractor shall minimize disturbance and maintain access to and use of fire exits at all

times the building is occupied.C. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the owner’s continuing

operations.D. Schedule and coordinate utility outages that will affect the Owner’s use of utilities.E. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.




1. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.16 PROTECTION OF PERSONS & PROPERTYA. The Contractor shall provide all necessary means and methods to protect persons or property

as provided for in Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions” and Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls”. In addition, the Contractor shall provide insurance for personal injury or property damage per Section 00 61 00 “Project Bonds and Insurance”.

1.17 SITE AUTHORITYA. The General Contractor shall have overall authority and responsibility of use of site and site

security in the project area and within the limits of construction. He shall coordinate the use of site by Subcontractors and they shall cooperate with the General Contractor in accordance with generally accepted construction practices.

B. The General Contractor shall have overall responsibility and authority for the Construction Schedule and shall be the custodian of same. He shall coordinate the work of Subcontractors and the work of the Owner in the preparation of the Project Schedule and make appropriate allowances for time and sequence in accordance with generally accepted construction practice.

1.18 SEQUENCE OF WORK - GENERALA. Provide all required project start-up submittals including Notice of Award, Owner/Contractor

Agreement, Bonds, Certificate of Insurance, List of Subcontractors and Major Suppliers, Schedule of Values, Project Schedule and Notice to Proceed.

B. Obtain, arrange for and pay for all necessary and required Permits, Licenses, Applications and Inspections.

C. Prepare and submit all required Notices, including Notice of Demolition to the DNR.D. Perform submittals and offsite fabrication as soon as possible to maximize on-site effectiveness

after last day of classes.E. Provide color samples as soon as possible that the Project Color Schedule may be completed

before review of individual submittals requiring color selections.F. It is intended that the work will begin with careful and thoughtful installation of construction

facilities and temporary controls as to allow for Owner’s continued use and occupancy of adjacent areas and minimal disturbance of same.1. Contractor to perform site mobilization including set up of job trailers / site office storage

trailers, storage yards and temporary utilities.2. Contractor to establish site security provisions including security fencing around work

area and site storage areas.G. Perform field engineering to establish point of beginning, datum points, reference points,

elevations and site layout.H. Review existing conditions and verify existing dimensions, angles and bearings.

1. Promptly notify architect of discrepancies.I. Prepare and submit all scheduled submittals and shop drawings.

1. Submit all products and materials requiring color selection as a group such that a project color schedule may be generated and approved by the Owner.

J. Perform scheduled demolition and salvage as shown on the Drawings.K. Perform new construction in accordance with the contractor’s schedule. Coordinate sequence

and schedule of new construction in general conformance to Contract Phasing Plan and to the best interest of the owner to minimize project cost and time.

L. Perform remodeling of the building within the project area as shown on the Drawings.M. Clean up site and building as specified and prepare for substantial completion and final

inspections.N. The Contractor shall, at the conclusion of the project, make all repairs to existing site

development, building construction, building systems, finishes, equipment casework, and




furnishings as may have been damaged by construction activities by the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors.

O. Perform project closeout procedures as specified including scheduled closeout submittals and including owner instruction on operation and maintenance of building systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 SCOPE OF WORK CLASSIFICATIONSA. Work by the Owner

1. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

2. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.a. Removal or relocation of all window blinds, loose furnishings and equipment.

3. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.a. Normal housekeeping and maintenance operations.

4. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.a. Re-installation of window blinds, loose furnishings and equipment.

B. Work by Others for the Owner:1. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be

carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

2. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.a. Site Survey – Not Applicableb. Testing Laboratory Services.

1) Special Testing, Observation and Inspection Services.2) Pre-Design Geotechnical Surveys – Not Applicable

c. Public Notice and Application for Storm Water Pollution Protection Plan Permits (DNR) – Not Applicable

d. Environmental Surveys as may be required. Not Applicablee. Historical and Archeological Surveys as may be required. Not Applicablef. Removal of Hazardous Materials including ACBM (Asbestos Containing Building

Materials).1) The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule his Work with the Work of the

Owner’s Asbestos Testing Agency and Abatement Contractor in removal of existing ACBM (Asbestos Containing Building Materials) that may be discovered and identified.

3. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.a. The Owner will be executing, under separate contract, simultaneous Re-windowing

of Thompson Hall. This Contractor shall coordinate with the work of that Contract as to minimize conflict and delay.




1) Installation of Telecommunications Equipment, Terminations, Devices and Cover Plates, except as otherwise noted in Base Bid and Alternates.

4. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. Not Applicable

3.2 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTSA. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing,

protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.B. Owner-Furnished Products include but are not necessarily limited to: Not Applicable

3.3 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTSA. Contractor shall furnish products indicated. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, and

protecting Contractor-furnished products as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout. Not Applicable

3.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION – SPECIFIC SEQUENCE OF WORKA. The Work shall be conducted in phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated:

1. Demolition shall not be initiated until new materials are confirmed or on site as to allow immediate subsequent remodeling work to commence.

2. The Contractor shall sequence the work such that once on site operations begin, they shall continue uninterrupted in smooth progression until the work is completed and turned over to Owner use.

3. The Work shall be scheduled and sequenced such that the Owner may continue use and occupancy of adjacent areas and conduct normal operations. Uninterrupted Normal shall be maintained by use of permanent or temporary systems. Coordinate momentary change over power interruptions with the Owner’s Director of Technology.

B. Before commencing Work, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, coordination of Work by Others and move-out and move-in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work.

3.5 SCHEDULE OF PROJECT: BASIS OF BID:A. Project Dates: (Approximate dates and Time Periods)

1. To 05/31/19 Completion of Design Development2. 07/15/19 - 5:00 pm MCSD Board Meeting – Informational3. 08/19/19 - 5:00 pm MCSD Board Meeting – Resolution to Set Public Hearing

Joshua Wesley and Chuck Springer top Present Project4. 06/03/19 - 08/23/19 Completion of Construction Documents to 95%5. 08/20/19 – 08/3019 Publish Notice of Public Hearing

a. MCSD Policy 801.5 Once, not more than 20 nor less than 4 days priorb. IA 26.12 & 362.3 Once, not more than 20 nor less than 4 days prior

6. 09/03/19 - 5:00 pm MCSD Board Meeting – Public Hearing7. 08/23/19 – 09/04/19 Complete Construction and Bidding Documents8. 09/05/19 - 09/09/19 Distribute to Bidders9. 09/04/19 - 09/20/19 Publish Notice of Letting

a. MCSD Policy 801.5 Once, not more than 45 nor less than 13 days priorb. IA 26.3 Once, not more than 45 nor less than 13 days prior

10. 09/05/19 - 10/03/19 Bidding Period11. 09/26/19 - 3:30 pm Pre-Bid Site Visits - Individually Scheduled12. 10/03/19 – 2:00 pm Receipt of Bids (MCSD SSC Conf. Room)13. 10/03/19 - 10/07/19 Consider Bids Received14. 10/07/19 - 5:00 pm MCSD Special Board Meeting – Award Contract15. 10/08/19 - 10/18/19 Notice of Award & Contracting




16. 10/21/19 - Construction Period Begins17. 10/14/19 - 10/25/19 Subcontracting, Submittals and Shop Drawings18. 10/28/19 - 11/01/19 Mobilization to Site – Field Verification19. 10/25/19 - 11/08/19 Off site fabrication / material delivery20. 11/11/19 - Begin Onsite Work21. 11/11/19 - 01/17/20 MHS Server Room – Head End Equipment (10 Weeks)

a. 11/11/19 - 11/15/19 Install New Switches and Patchesb. 11/18/19 - 01/10/20 Patching In Various Schools & Sitsc. 01/13/20 - 01/17/20 Substantial Completion Insp and Punch List Work

22. 11/11/19 - 11/29/19 Franklin (3 Weeks)a. Week 1 & 2: Demolition & New Construction b. Week 3: Substantial Completion Insp and Punch List Work

23. 11/18/19 - 12/06/19 Rogers (3 Weeks)24. 11/25/19 - 12/13/19 Woodbury (3 Weeks)25. 12/02/19 - 12/20/19 Hoglan (3 Weeks)26. 12/09/19 - 12/27/19 Anson (3 Weeks)27. 12/16/19 - 01/03/20 Fisher (3 Weeks)28. 12/23/19 - 01/10/20 SSC / MLA (3 Weeks)29. 12/30/19 - 01/17/20 Lenihan (3 Weeks) {Alternate AC-#02}30. 01/06/20 - 01/24/20 Miller (3 Weeks) {Alternate AC-#01}31. 01/13/20 - 01/31/20 MHS (3 Weeks) {Alternate AC-#01}32. 02/03/20 - 02/14/20 Substantial Completion Punch List Work, Programming

Adjusting, Testing, Balancing, Owner Training33. 02/14/20 On Site Final Substantial Completion34. 02/03/20 - 02/14/20 Project Closeout35. 02/17/20 Board Resolution – Accept as Substantially Complete36. 03/17/20 Final Payment (30 Days after Board Resolution37. 02/14/20 – 02/14/21 12 Month Warranty Period

3.6 SCHEDULE AND COMPLETIONA. Project Schedule / Sequence of Work

1. The Project Schedule and Sequence of Work shall be per the Approved Project Schedule as prepared and submitted by the Contractor in general conformance to the above Basis of Bid Project Schedule.

B. Substantial Completion Dates.1. Completion: Timely completion of the Project, as scheduled, is of paramount importance

in evaluation of performance. The Owner will implement remedies as reserved by Contract to promote timely completion. A deviation of greater than two weeks from the approved Project Schedule shall result in the Contractor submitting a plan of correction to make up lost time to the satisfaction of the Owner. A deviation greater than three weeks from the approved Project Schedule, not otherwise agreed to by the Owner via Change Order, may initiate notice to the Surety Company. Additional delay without effort to correct or make up lost time may result in the Owner invoking his Bonding Protection as reserved by the Contract Documents, which may include augmenting the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s forces, or replacing the Contractor and / or his Subcontractors.

END OF SECTION - 01 11 00

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 01 21 00ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.1. Related Documents:

a. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”: Allowances.b. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”: Allowancesc. Document 00 60 00 “Project Forms”: AIA G702 / 703, Schedule of Values,

Request for Paymentd. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions”e. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes:

1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.2. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have

been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

3. Types of allowances include the following:a. Lump-sum allowances.b. Unit-cost allowances.c. Quantity allowances.d. Contingency allowances.e. Testing and inspecting allowances.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 22 00 "Measurement and Payment - Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit

prices.2. Section 01 26 00 “Modification Procedures”: Change Order to increase or decrease

Contract Sum based on actual costs or units used in comparison to the scheduled allowances.

3. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting.

4. Section 08 71 00 – “Door Hardware”: Lump Sum Allowance5. Section 28 33 00 – “Security Management System”: Lump Sum Allowance

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASEA. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final

selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.B. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form

specified for Change Orders.C. Shop Drawings: Provide sizes, types, finishes, schedule locations, and details of adjoining

WorkD. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining

Work.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, rough-in dimensions.




1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for

use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of

allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of

the Work.

1.6 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to

coordinate installation.

1.7 LUMP-SUM, UNIT-COST AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCESA. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner

or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include applicable taxes, if any, taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by the Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner.

Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.8 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCESA. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by

Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner

under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, applicable taxes, if any, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.9 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCESA. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests

and inspections, and reporting results.B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs

for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to

Owner by Change Order.

1.10 PAYMENT INFORMATIONA. Required Information - Before ordering any material covered by an allowance, Contractor shall

submit the following information to Architect for review: 1. Actual price per unit for material (copy of written proposal from manufacturer, supplier,

subcontractor, as case may be).2. Allowance price per unit for material; 3. Number of units required on project.




B. Allowances shall appear as individual line items on Schedule of ValuesC. Requests for Payment on account of scheduled Allowances shall be made on Monthly Pay

Request in accordance to the consumption of the Allowance.

1.11 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCESA. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based

on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other margins claimed.3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders

related to unit-cost allowances.4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent

quantity survey, measure, or count.B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance

described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost

amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.12 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 00 70 00.

1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00.B. Record actual locations of all additional Electronic Door Hardware installed under Allowance 1.C. Record actual locations of all additional Electronic Door Hardware installed under Allowance 2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return

damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and

installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCESA. Allowance No. 1: Door Hardware Allowance - Lump-Sum / Contingency Allowance:

1. The Contractor shall include in the Bid, the sum of $2,500.00 for additional Electronic Door Hardware in accordance with Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" and as scheduled on Drawings.




2. This allowance includes material cost only.3. Unused amounts to be credited back to the Owner in accordance with the actual amount

used.4. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with corresponding unit-price requirements in

Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."B. Allowance No. 2: Security Management System Allowance - Lump-Sum / Contingency

Allowance: 1. The Contractor shall include in the Bid, the sum of $2,500.00 for additional Electronic

Door Hardware in accordance with Section 28 33 00 – “Security Management System”: and as scheduled on Drawings.

2. This allowance includes material cost only.3. Unused amounts to be credited back to the Owner in accordance with the actual amount

used.




SECTION 01 22 00MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (UNIT PRICES)

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”: Allowances.b. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”: Allowancesc. Document 00 60 00 “Project Forms”: AIA G702 / 703, Schedule of Values,

Request for Paymentd. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions”e. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes:

1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing measurement and payment (Unit Prices).

2. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to portions of the Work performed under a unit price payment method. (Change Orders, Existing Conditions)

3. Schedule of unit prices required on the Bid Form. – Not Applicable4. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected Work.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices.2. Section 01 23 00 “Alternates” for Alternate Scopes of Work3. Section 01 26 00 “Modification Procedures”: Change Order to increase or decrease

Contract Sum based on actual costs or units used in comparison to the scheduled allowances.

4. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting.

1.3 AUTHORITYA. Measurement methods delineated in the individual Specification Sections complement the

criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern.

B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. The Architect/Engineer and/or Construction Manager will verify measurements and quantities.

C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required.

1.4 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIEDA. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and Contract purposes only. Quantities and

measurements supplied or placed in the Work and verified by the independent testing agency or Architect/Engineer determine payment.

B. If the actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide the required quantities at the unit sum/prices contracted.

C. If the actual Work requires a 15% or greater change in quantity than those quantities indicated, the Owner or Contractor may Claim for a Contract Price adjustment.

1.5 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIESA. Measurement Devices:

1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state Weights and Measures department within the past year.

2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle.




3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State department within the past year.

B. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight.

C. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness.

D. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius.E. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord.F. Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means

or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work.G. Time: Labor or equipment time if chargeable.

1. Equipment time to be identified as with or without operator, mobilization, down time or active time.

2. Labor to be logged and identified as normal working hours or overtime.

1.6 PAYMENTA. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant,

transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.

B. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Architect/Engineer multiplied by the unit sum/price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.

1.7 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the

Architect/Engineer will direct one of the following remedies:1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new

sum/price at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer.2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Architect/Engineer

and the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer.

C. The individual Specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.

D. The authority of the Architect/Engineer to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final.

1.8 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle.4. Products damaged during shipping and handling.5. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work.6. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.7. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected Products.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICESA. Unit prices as associated with unit price change order per paragraph 1.8 Section 01 26 00.B. Unit prices may be used to extend allowance quantities above those specified, or to credit

unused portions of Allowance quantities.C. Specific Unit Prices as follows:

1. As required for Time and Materials Change Orders.








SECTION 01 23 00ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 21 13 “Instructions to Bidders”: Allowances.b. Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”: Allowancesc. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: d. Document 00 41 13 “Bid Form”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.2. Schedule and description of alternate materials, systems, components or equipment;

and/or additions or deletions to project scope of work to be bid separately for the owner’s consideration.

3. Submission procedures.4. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”.2. Section 01 21 00 “Allowances” for additional work not scheduled3. Section “01 22 00 “Measurement and Payment (Unit Prices)”4. Section 01 25 00 “Request for Material & Equipment Substitution”5. Section 01 60 00 “Material and Equipment”: Product options and substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 REQUIREMENTSA. Submit Alternates with full description of the proposed Alternate and note the affect on adjacent

or related components.B. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner’s option.

Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Notice of Award and Owner-Contractor Agreement.C. Performance and Payment Bonds shall be in an amount to include Base Bid and accepted

Alternates.D. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work to integrate the Work of each Alternate

accepted.

1.5 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVESA. Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternates described below and list in Bid Form Document or

any supplement to it, which requests a ‘difference’ in Bid Price by adding to or deducting from the Base Bid price.




B. The Bid will be evaluated on Base Bid price plus any combination of Alternates which serves the best interest of the Owner, as judged by the Owner, and remains within the funds available. See also Instructions to Bidders, Document 00 21 13, “Method of Award” and Document 00 11 13 “Invitation to Bid”.

1.6 PROCEDURESA. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project.1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:

A. Access Control Alternates:

1. AC-#01: Access Controls at Miller Middle School and Marshalltown High School.a. Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management

System and Devices; Drawings: 24” x 36” Drawings bound separately of the Project Manual.

b. Description: State the Amount to be Added to the Base Bid for equipping or re-equipping Security Entrance Vestibules, and additional staff, dietary or playground entrances with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System.

c. This Alternate is an ADD to the BASE BID and method of stating same is provided on Document 00 41 13 Bid Form.

2. AC-#02: Access Controls at Lenihan Intermediate School.a. Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management


b. Description: State the Amount to be Added to the Base Bid for equipping or re-equipping Security Entrances (as scheduled) with access controls including associated intercom and local video surveillance, and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System.





B. Video Surveillance Alternates:

1. VS-#01: Additional Video Surveillance Systems at MCSD Elementary Schools.a. Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management


b. Description: State the Amount to be Added to the Base Bid to provide new video surveillance system components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Anson Elementary School, Fisher Elementary School, Franklin Elementary School, Hoglan Elementary School, Rogers Elementary School, Woodbury Elementary School.


2. VS-#02: Additional Video Surveillance Systems at Intermediate School and Support Service Center / MLA.a. Reference: Sections 08 71 00 – Door Hardware, 28 33 00 – Security Management


b. Description: State the Amount to be Added to the Base Bid to provide new video surveillance system components including associated scheduled accessories and integrating same into the established District Wide Avigilon Video Surveillance and Access Control System for Lenihan Intermediate School and Support Services Center / MLA.


C. ALLOWANCES: (See also Section 01 21 00 – Allowances) N/A




SECTION 01 25 00SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.2. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.3. Section 01 25 13 “Request for Material Substitution” Substitution Submittal Form4. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method

cannot be provided, if applicable.b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and

addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES.




j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURESA. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONSA. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.




C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)







FORM 01 25 13REQUEST FOR MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION (PRE-BID)


____ TO: TSP Inc., P.O Box 1534., Marshalltown, IA 50158 Phone: 641-752-3930 ____ TO: TSP Inc., 1112 N. West Ave., Sioux Falls, SD 57104 Phone: 605-336-1160

PROJECT: MCSD Security Management System – Phase 3LOCATION: Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 – TSP C/N: 06190256.00

SPECIFIED ITEM:_________ _____ ___________ _____________________________________________________________SECTION PAGE PARAGRAPH DESCRIPTIONThe undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:____________________________________________________________________

REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION:__________________________________________________________________

CREDIT TO OWNER, (for substitution proposed as an attachment to Bid Form, if allowed, or in conjunction with a Change Order proposal): $_________________________.00.

Attached data includes Product description, Specifications, Drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions are clearly identified.Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments are correct:1. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute Product and determined that it is equal or superior in

all respects to that specified.2. Represents that the Contractor will provide the same Warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that

specified.3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs and waives all Claims for additional costs

related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent.4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute making such changes as may be required for the Work to be

complete in all respects.5. Where a substitution will require changes or modifications to the Work of other Contractors, the cost of same shall be

included in the Contractor's cost data. The Contractor will assume the cost of any additional Work arising from his failure to list required changes in the Work of other Contractors.

6. Where Suppliers or Subcontractors provide alternate materials or equipment as part of the bidding process it shall be their responsibility to insure that they fit Project requirements and conditions. Any additional costs which may subsequently arise due to failure to properly coordinate the requirements shall be borne by the proposer.

7. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.8. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect to the Construction Schedule.9. Maintenance and service will be locally available for the proposed substitution.The undersigned states that the function, appearance, quality, and performance of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

Submitted by: ( ) Architect: TSP Inc. Marshalltown OfficeSignature__________________________ ( ) Mechanical Engineer: TSP Inc.

( ) Electrical Engineer: TSP Inc. Firm_______________________________ ( ) Accepted ( ) Accepted As Noted

( ) Not Accepted ( ) Received too lateAddress____________________________ ___________________________________ By _____________________________________________

Date_______________________________ Date ___________________________________________

Telephone:_________________________ Remarks _______________________________________

Fax: _______________________________ _______________________________________________

E-mail______________________________ _______________________________________________

Attachments: END OF SECTION 01 25 00


FORM 01 25 13REQUEST FOR MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION (PRE-BID)




TSP, Inc. © 01 26 00 - 1/4 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/042019

SECTION 01 26 00MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 19.01 “Existing Conditions Photographs”c. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”: Construction Drawings of

Existing Buildings, Site Survey, Geotechnical Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report.

d. Document 00 52 13 “AIA A101 - Agreement Forms”: Monetary values of established Unit Prices and percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit.

e. Document 00 60 00 “Project Forms” Change Order Formf. Document 00 61 00 “Bonds and Insurance”g. Document 00 72 13 “AIA A201 - General Conditions”: Governing requirements for

changes in the Work, in Contract Sum/Price, and Contract Time, List of Major Suppliers and Subcontractors, Schedule of Values and Payment applications.

h. Document 00 73 00 “Supplemental Conditions”


1. Submittals.2. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.3. Change procedures.4. Construction Change Authorization/Directive. 5. Stipulated Sum Change Order.6. Unit price Change Order.7. Time and material Change Order.8. Execution of Change Orders.9. Correlation of Contractor submittals.10. Update of Project Record Documents.

B. Related Sections1. Section 01 22 00 “Measurement & Payment (Unit Prices)”2. Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”. 3. Section 01 60 00 / 01 25 00 “Material and Equipment”: Product options and substitutions.4. Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout”: Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. If change is proposed and requested by the Owner:

1. Architect will issue to the Contractor a written request for proposal (RFP) for change in Contract. Supplemental drawings may be included, if necessary.

2. Request for change quotation will identify the following:a. Substitution of material or equipment.b. Increase or deletion in Scope of Work.c. Method of pay request quotation, i.e., stipulated sum, unit prices, time and

materials.3. Contractor shall respond with a written response in the form requested for consideration

by the Owner.4. Contractor shall include consideration of proposed change on adjacent or associated

Work, other trades, sequence of work and contract time.

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/



5. Owner shall review and accept or reject contractor’s proposal for the proposed change being considered.

6. If accepted by the Owner the Architect will prepare and issue the appropriate change documentation and distribute for signature and file.

B. If a change is identified and proposed by the Contractor:1. The Contractor shall make written proposal for change to the Architect.2. Written proposal for change shall include the following:

a. Identification of substituted material or equipment.b. Identification of increase or deletion in Project Scope.c. Identification of effect of proposed change on adjacent or associated work, other

trades, sequence of work and contract time.d. Contractor shall include drawings or sketches as may be necessary.e. Reason for making proposal for a change in the contract.f. Contractor shall provide a complete breakdown of all costs associated with each

change order for review by the Owner and Architect. All work by subcontractors and others must also be supported by detailed cost estimates included in the contractor’s request. Breakdowns shall include labor hours, labor rates, unit prices, quantities, material costs, equipment costs, subcontractor quotations, and mark-up calculations. This information may be submitted by electronic methods at the option of the Contractor.

3. The Architect shall review the Contractor’s proposal and forward it to the Owner with his recommendations and comments.

4. Owner shall review and accept or reject the proposed change being considered.5. If accepted by the owner, the Architect will prepare and issue the appropriate change

documentation and distribute for signature and file. C. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order: (to be prepared by the Architect)

1. A copy may be examined at the office of the Architect and/or a copy may be purchased from Iowa Chapter, American Institute of Architects, 1000 Walnut St., Suite 101, Des Moines, IA 50309 (telephone: 515-244-7502)

1.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIMEA. Maintain detailed records of Work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information

required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work.B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of

the quotation.C. On request, provide additional data to support computations:

1. Quantities of products, labor and equipment.2. Insurance and bonds.3. Overhead and profit.4. Justification for any change in Contract Time.5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

D. Support each Claim for additional costs or time, and for Work done on a time and material basis, with additional information:1. Origin and date of Claim.2. Dates and times Work was performed, and by whom.3. Time records and wage rates paid.4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and Subcontracts, similarly documented.

1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURESA. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to

Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 2017 Edition. B. The Architect/Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal (RFP) which includes a detailed

description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the




requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days of Contractor receipt of Architect’s request.

C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other Contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 / 01 25 00.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Architect may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed

with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.B. The Document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any

change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.C. Promptly execute the change in Work.

1.7 STIPULATED SUM CHANGE ORDERA. Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation.

1.8 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDERA. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit

price basis.B. For unit costs or quantities of units of Work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under

a Construction Change Directive (G714).C. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and

Material Change Order.

1.9 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDERA. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits

indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.B. Architect/Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract

Time as provided in the Contract Documents.C. Maintain detailed records of Work done on Time and Material basis.D. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs

for changes in the Work.

1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERSA. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of

parties as provided in the General & Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.B. Contractor shall be responsible to inform all subcontractors, suppliers, and others affected by

the change in the contract as accepted. All costs, penalties, restocking charges, delays and claims due to the contractor’s failure to inform affected parties shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALSA. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each

authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum/Price.B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise

sub-schedules to adjust time for other items of Work affected by the change, and resubmit.C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.12 ALLOWABLE CONTRACTOR MARK UP, FEES, OVERHEAD & PROFITA. For all change orders as agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor, the Prime Contractor’s

mark up shall be limited as stated in Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” paragraph 1.8.A (additional paragraph 7.2.3 to the General Conditions.









FORM 01 29 90SUB-SCHEDULE OF STORED MATERIALS VALUE

PART 1 - GENERAL

To: Marshalltown Community School DistrictSupport Services Center, 1002 S. 23rd Ave., Marshalltown, Iowa 50158

RE: MCSD Security Management System – Phase 3Marshalltown Community School District, Marshalltown, Iowa 50158TSP C/N: 06190251.00

In accordance with Article 9.3.2 of AIA A201-2007 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2007 Edition, the Contractor certifies that the following products, destined for incorporation into this Project and for which payment is requested, as of this date are suitably stored in the Contractor's warehouse or at the warehouse of the Supplier or Subcontractor involved. The Contractor also certifies that these products or materials are tagged or otherwise identified as belonging to the Project. The Contractor further certifies that upon receipt of payment, full title to same shall pass to the Owner and that the Owner's interests are fully protected by suitable insurance coverage.

It is understood that payment for products or materials stored off site will NOT be made without attachment of this or equipment form to the pay request within which payment is requested.

All required documentation is attached including Certificate of Insurance and Shipping Manifest.

ITEM LOCATION VALUE

SUBMITTED: ACCEPTED:

__________________________________________ __TSP, Inc.______________________________(Contractor) (Architect)

BY:_______________________________________ By:____________________________________

DATE:_____________________________________ DATE:__________________________________

PART 2 - PRODUCTS–N/APART 3 - EXECUTION–N/A



SECTION 01 29 90SUB-SCHEDULE OF STORED MATERIALS VALUE




TSP, Inc. © 01 33 00 - 1/4 06-190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SET 09/04/2019

SECTION 01 33 00SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 – “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 21 – “Information Available to Bidders”: Site Survey, Geotechnical

Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report.c. Section 00 51 00 – Notice of Award: Identification of accepted alternates.d. Section 00 52 13 – Agreement Forms: Accepted Alternates & Adjustments.e. Section 00 55 00 - Notice to Proceed: Acknowledge Notice to Proceed.f. Section 00 61 00 – Project Bonds and Insuranceg. Section 00 72 13 – General Conditions, A.I.A. Document A201 – 2007h. Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditionsi. Section 00 91 13 – Addenda


1. Submittal procedures.2. Proposed products list.3. Shop Drawings.4. Product / Technical Data.5. Samples.6. Manufacturers' instructions.7. Manufacturers' certificates.

B. Related Requirements1. All Pre-Specification Sections beginning “00___” and Division 1 apply to this Section.2. Section 01 21 00 – Allowances3. Section 01 22 00 – Measurement and Payment (Unit Prices)4. Section 01 23 00 – Alternates5. Section 01 26 00 - Modification Procedures 6. Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements 7. Section 01 45 23 – Quality Control & Testing and Inspecting Services8. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.9. Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout: Contract and Closeout submittals.10. Section 01 78 23 - Operation & Maintenance Data11. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties and Bonds, Contractor Certificates

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Re-submittals to have original number with an

alphabetic suffix.B. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail

number(s), and Specification Section number, as appropriate.C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not previously reviewed by the Contractor and not bearing his stamp will be returned.

D. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at business address. Coordinate submission of related items, including samples and color selections where appropriate.




E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

F. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.G. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal.H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report

any inability to comply with provisions.

1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LISTA. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed

for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or

catalog designation, and reference standards.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and minimum three opaque reproduction.B. After review reproduce and distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and for

Record Documents described in Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout.C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location

of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.D. Include engineer’s seal and certification where required by individual sections.E. Note field measurements, deviations from contract requirements and considerations that will

affect the Work of others.

1.6 PRODUCT / TECHNICAL DATAA. Submit five (5) copies, plus two (2) copies, which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement

manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for

Record Documents described in Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout.D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and

location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

1.7 SAMPLES / COLOR OR FINISH SELECTIONSA. Submit where required, Samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the

Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate Sample Submittals for interfacing Work.

B. Submit Samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection samples to be submitted as to support architect’s preparation of project color schedule and color board.

C. Include identification on each Sample, with full Project information.D. Submit the number or Samples specified in individual Specification Sections; two of which will

be retained by Architect/Engineer.E. Reviewed Samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONSA. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions

for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.




1.9 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATESA. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to

Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting

reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be

acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.10 WARRANTIESA. Submit equipment, product and/or system warranties as required by individual sections at

Project Closeout as required by Section 01 77 00 and 01 78 36.

1.11 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATAA. Submit Operation & Maintenance Data as required by individual sections for equipment and

systems in accordance with provisions of Section 01 77 00 and 01 78 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTION – NOT USED


SCHEDULE 0 - SUBMITTALS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures Change Orders, Cost +/-, Both Labor

and Material, Justification01 29 90 Sub-Schedule of Stored Materials Value Item, Value, Storage Location, Schedule of

Subcontractors & Major Suppliers01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Update and Submit w/Application for Payment01 45 00 Quality Control & Testing and Inspection Acceptance On-Site Inspection, Reports,

Services Field Samples, Mock-ups, Construction photographs

01 60 00 Material & Equipment Test Reports01 73 29 Cutting and Patching Project Record Documents, Location01 75 00 Facility Start-Up/Commissioning Test Reports, Service Reports01 77 00 Contract Closeout Project Record Documents, Final Application for

Payment, Consent of Surety, Spare Parts, Maintenance & Operation Manuals, Lien Waivers, Hazardous Material Exclusion, Fire Safety Submittals to the State of Iowa, Construction Photographs

01 78 23 Operation & Maintenance Data Manuals, Instruction of Owner Personnel, Submittals

01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Signed Documents

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02 41 19 Selective Building Demolition for Remodeling Project Record Documents, Salvage materials

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE – N/ADIVISION 4 – MASONRY – N/ADIVISION 5 - METAL – N/A




DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Product Data, Evaluation Reports

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping Product Data, Product Schedule, Installer

Certificates07 92 00 Joint Sealers Product/Technical Data, Samples, Manufacturers

Installation Instructions, Joint-Sealant Schedule, Product test reports, Warranty

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS08 71 00 Door Hardware Shop Drawings, Product/Technical Data, Mfg.

parts lists, templates, Project Record Documents, Sample, Mfg. Installation Instructions, Warranty, Extra Materials, Schedule

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES09 91 13 Exterior Painting Product Data, Samples, Product List, Extra

Materials09 91 23 Interior Painting Product Data, Samples, Mftr. Inst. Instr.,

Samples, Extra Materials

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES – N/ADIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – N/A DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – N/ADIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS – N/ADIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION – N/ADIVISION 22 – PLUMBING – N/ADIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) – N/ADIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION – N/A

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL - See Individual Sections for Submittal Requirements.

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – See Individual Sections for Submittal Requirements.

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY – See Individual Sections for Submittal Requirements.

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK – N/A DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS – N/ADIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – N/ADIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION – N/ADIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION – N/ADIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION – N/ADIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 42 – PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT– N/ADIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 45 – INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT – N/ADIVISION 48 – ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION – N/A




SECTION 01 35 16ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 – “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 21 – “Information Available to Bidders”: Site Survey, Geotechnical

Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report.


1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work.2. Transition and adjustments.3. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.4. Repair of existing site development including lawns, curbs, sidewalks, parking areas and

landscaping.B. Related Requirements

1. All Pre-Specification Sections beginning “00___” and Division 1 apply to this Section.2. Section 00 72 13 - General Conditions: 3. Section 00 73 00 - Supplementary Conditions: Supervision, coordination & meetings4. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work: Work sequence, work restrictions and owner

occupancy.5. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary

enclosures. Protection of installed work. Cleaning during construction.6. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting & Patching.7. Section 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition for Remodeling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORKA. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and Work for patching

and extending Work.B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where

necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work.B. Beginning of repair work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work.

Replace and restore at completion.B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, and corroded metals.

Replace materials as specified for finished Work.C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new Work.


SECTION 01 35 16ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES


3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate Work of alternations and renovations to expedite completion and to accommodate

Owner occupancy.B. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of

restoring Products and finishes to pre-construction existing condition.

3.4 TRANSITIONSA. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth, crisp and even transition.

Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture, color and appearance.B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible,

terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer.

3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACESA. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing

other imperfections.B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.C. Repair all existing site development not scheduled for demolition but damaged due to

construction.1. Damage Lawn Areas:

a. Provide topsoil to 6” depth to restore finished grade, aerate soils.b. Sod damaged areas up to 200 square feet.c. Seed damaged areas above 200 square feet.

2. Repair damaged existing curbs, sidewalks and parking areas with like materials and methods equal to that as specified for new construction. Restore painted lines and markings.

3. Remove and replace damaged plant material with like species.

3.6 FINISHESA. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections.B. Finish patches to product uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be

matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.7 CLEANINGA. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01 50 00, clean Owner occupied areas of Work.




SECTION 01 41 00REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL






1. Reference to codes, ordinances and regulations, fees, permits applicable and in effect at the time and location of this Work are hereby referenced as an integral part of the Specifications.

2. Codes, ordinances and regulations established minimum standards of design detail, materials, and workmanship. This is not to preclude the establishment of non-conflicting higher level construction as may be specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings.

3. In case of conflict between any of the standards established herein and a governmental code or ordinance, refer to the Architect/Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding with the Work involved.

4. Fees and Permits:a. Contractor shall apply for, obtain and pay for all required permits and inspections.

The cost of all permits and inspections to be included in the Base Bid. b. Permit fee only for IDNR NPDES General Permit No. 2 shall be by the Owner.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project (Single Prime Contract)”2. Section 01 35 16 “Alteration Project Procedures”3. Section 01 45 00 “Quality Requirements & Testing and Inspecting Services”

1.3 CODES AND REGUALTIONS – STATE BUILDING CODE: (As Noted or Latest Editions)A. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 641 & 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the

following: Chapters 661 - 18, 300 – 303, 350, and 430 adopting the following:1. State Handicapped Accessibility Code

a. IAC 661-18 Accessible Requirements for Parking b. IAC 661-302 Accessible Building Requirements

1) ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act including 2010 ADA Standards.2. IBC - International Building Code – 2015 Edition (New Construction)

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.3.3. IBC - International Existing Building Code – 2015 Edition (Existing Construction)

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.7.4. IFC – International Fire Code – 2015 Edition.

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.3.5. IMC - International Mechanical Code – 2018 Edition.

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.4.b. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 as adopted by IAC 661-301.4

6. State Plumbing Codea. IAC 641-25 State Plumbing Code

1) UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code – 2018 Edition.a) With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 641-25 & 61-

301.6.




2) IPC - International Plumbing Code – 2018 Edition.a) Regulating Minimum Number of Plumbing Fixtures for Public

Assembly Spaces Designated IAC 661-301 Sub-rules 301.6(1) and 301.6(2)

7. NEC - National Electrical Code – 2017 Editiona. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.5.

8. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code – 2012 Editiona. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC.

9. ASME A17.1 – 2000 – Safety Code for Elevators & Escalators.10. State Applications, Permits and Inspections per IAC including:

a. IAC 661-300.5 – State Building Code – Administration1) Inspections for Footing, Rough Ins, and Occupancy

11. Licensing of Trades

1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS – STATE FIRE MARSALL’S OFFICE (As Noted or Latest Additions) – REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: Chapters 661 - 5, 18, 201,210, 226, 231, 251, 259, and 291 adopting the following:1. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Handbook – 2000 Addition.2. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association and building code regulations governing:

a. Standards on Building Construction and Demolitionb. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishersc. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code – 2000 Editiond. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors & Other Opening Protectives - Openings in fire

resistive constructione. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems - Smoke & Fire Dampersf. Fire Alarm & Detection Systems (NFPA 71)g. NFPA 220 – Standard on Types of Constructionh. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assembliesi. NFPA 257 – Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assembliesj. Fuel storage and piping systemsk. Regulations governing clearances to combustible materials

1.5 CODES AND REGULATIONS – IOWA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR and WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT (As Noted or Latest Additions)

A. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 347 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: Chapters 347 – 71 and 72 with regard to Elevators and Elevator Inspections.

1.6 CODES AND REGULATIONS – IOWA DEPARTMENT OF INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS (As Noted or Latest Additions)

A. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 481 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: Chapters 481 – 31 thru 58

1.7 CODES AND REGUALTIONS – EXISTING BUILDINGSA. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the

following: Chapters 661 – 301.7 adopting the following:1. IEBC - International Existing Building Code – 2015 Edition

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.3.

1.8 CODES AND REGULATIONS – HISTORIC BUILDINGA. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the

following: Chapters 661 – 350




1.9 CODES AND REGUALTIONS – RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION – Not ApplicableA. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the

following: Chapters 661 – 301.8 adopting the following:1. IRC – International Residential Code – 2015 Edition

a. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC 661-301.3.

1.10 CODES AND REGULATIONS - DNR - Iowa Department of National ResourcesA. Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a

"Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are trained and certified in lead-safe work practices.

B. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: 1. Chapters 661–69, 661-70 relating to Lead Paint.

C. Other regulations involving:1. Refuse disposal2. Fuel storage and piping3. Demolition

1.11 INSPECTIONS BY STATE OF IOWA (Where not provided locally) – the following as a minimum. Provide sufficient notice as required.1. Footings – after setting forms and placing rebar – before placing concrete.2. Foundations – after setting forms and placing rebar – before placing concrete.3. Framing – before covering4. Electrical Service – prior to energizing5. Electrical Wiring and Piping – before covering6. Plumbing Rough-ins – before covering, with pressure and water column tests on.7. Water and sewer services – prior to backfilling.8. Mechanical Rough-ins – prior to covering, including gas line pressure test.9. Final – prior to occupancy.

1.12 LOCAL CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES & REGULATIONSA. Local codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of the City of Marshalltown, Iowa in force at

the time of commencement of work.1. Adopted Building Codes and Regulations

a. Licensing of Trades2. Municipal Utility Regulations and ordinances

a. SUDAS – Statewide Urban Design and Specifications – where adopted, and / or where referenced by the Drawings.

3. Local erosion control ordinances.4. Local storm water control ordinances.5. Right-Of-Way Regulations:

a. Construction requirements for driveway and parking lot approaches.6. Haul routes and restrictions.7. Work in public right-of-way

a. Permits, applications, bonds and inspections.8. Local Zoning Ordinances9. Applications, reviews and Inspections by Local Building Officials10. Lead Paint (disturbance, removal and / or encapsulation), Training and Certifications.

B. INSPECTIONS BY City of Marshalltown, Iowa – the following as a minimum or per local ordinance.

a. Demolitionb. Footings – after setting forms and placing rebar – before placing concrete.c. Foundations – after setting forms and placing rebar – before placing concrete.




d. Framing – before coveringe. Electrical Service – prior to energizingf. Electrical Wiring and Piping – before coveringg. Plumbing Rough-ins – before covering, with pressure and water column tests on.h. Water and sewer services – prior to backfilling.i. Mechanical Rough-ins – prior to covering, including gas line pressure test.j. Final – prior to occupancy.

1.13 MUNICIPAL & FRANCHISE UTILITIESA. Perform utility work in conformance with municipal or franchise utility providing service and/or

applicable urban standards.B. Coordinate project requirements with utility providing services as below:

1. City of Marshalltown, Iowaa. Water serviceb. Sanitary sewer servicec. Storm sewer service

2. Alliant Utility Companya. Electrical serviceb. Natural gas service

3. Telephone Servicea. Owner’s current provider

4. Glass fiber servicea. Iowa Public Television (IPTV) – ICN.

1.14 ENERGY CODES & STANDARDSA. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code – 2012 Edition

1. With additions, deletions and modifications per IAC.B. Model Energy Code – Residential -- N/AC. ASHRAE 90.1 1989 – High Rise Residential & Commercial Construction.

1.15 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. SUDAS – Statewide Urban Design and Specifications.B. ANSI A117.1 - Code for Access for the HandicappedC. Fire Rated Assemblies

1. Uniform Building Code – Vol. 3 & Evaluation Reports.2. UL – Underwriters Laboratory – Fire Resistance Directory.3. FM – Factory Mutual – Fire Resistance Directory.4. WH – Warnock Hersey – Certification Listings.5. SMACNA – Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems.






SECTION 01 45 00QUALITY CONTROL & TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”: Pre-design Geotechnical Report, Survey

b. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction – AIA Document A201”: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.

c. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.1. Quality assurance and control of installations.2. Field Samples.3. Mock-up.4. Manufacturers' field services and reports.5. Construction photographs

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Off site and on site observation, sampling and testing by the Contractor and by the Owner’s Testing Agency.

5. Section includes Observation, Sampling and Testing as directed for suspected non-complying work.

6. On site observation and measurement to quantify work performed under unit prices.C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section 01 22 00 “Measurement and Payment”: Verification and Measurement of work performed under Unit Prices.

2. Division 01 Section 01 25 00 “Request for Material & Equipment Substitution”: Product Options and Substitutions.

3. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”: Manufacturer's certificates.4. Division 01 Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”: Special Testing in accordance

with Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)5. Division 01 Section 01 60 00 “Material and Equipment”: Requirements for material and

product quality, delivery, handling and storage.6. Division 01 Section 01 78 36 “Warranties and Bonds”: Inspection to initiate

Manufacturer’s Warranties.7. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of

required tests and inspections.8. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.




1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI / ASTM D3740 “Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection

of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction”.B. ANSI / ASTM E329 “Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,

Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction”.

1.4 DEFINITIONSA. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to

verify performance characteristics.2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from

the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTSA. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,




comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior and / or laboratory mockups, provide plans, sections,

and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel.C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:1. Specification Section number and title.2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLANA. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,

and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.2. Quality Control Manager shall regularly report at the Monthly Construction Conference..

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.




D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority if included in the Owner Team.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTSA. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.14. Reports shall be issued within 72 hours from the time of the test to the Owner, the

Architect, the Civil Engineer and the Structural Engineer and may be submitted electronically.a. Reports that identify non-compliance to Project Requirements shall be issued

within 24 hours from the time the test is taken.B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.




7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHSA. Contractor shall photograph, for file, major activities of the Work for which the Owner’s

representative or the Architect are unable to observe.B. Activities that may require file photographs include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Soil and waste piping.2. Below grade soil conditions and soil preparation activities.

a. Over-excavationb. Engineered backfillc. Caisson and/or auger-cast pile drilling and placementd. Unusual existing conditions

3. Placement of concrete.4. Installation of waterproofing systems.5. Installation of foundation drainage systems.6. Masonry and concrete reinforcement.7. Details in construction that subsequent Work will conceal and make inaccessible for later

observation.C. Construction photographs shall be typical color prints as provided by local commercial film

processing establishments. As a Contractor’s Option, digital photographs may be provided.1. Double prints to be provided for Architect’s file and for Contractor’s file.2. Construction photographs to be labeled as to location, time and date.3. Where applicable, such as in concrete placement, weather conditions shall also be noted.4. Where important as reference, location and direction of view of construction photographs

shall be noted on the Contractor’s “As Built” Drawings.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions,

and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.2. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.3. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.




C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and ANSI / ASTM D3740; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.3. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time appropriate registered Engineer on staff to review

services.4. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy

traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.




2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Field Samples: Install Field Samples at the site as required by individual Specifications Sections for review.1. Acceptable Samples represent a minimum quality level standard for the remaining Work.2. Where field Sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after

Work judged against the field Sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.L. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at the Project.4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.8. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections, accepted mock-up can and may be a

part of the construction. If mock-up area is accepted by Architect mock-up may remain as part of the overall construction, if mock-up is not accepted, mock-up will be removed.

M. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and / or as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual specification sections, along with supporting materials.1. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices,

flashings, seals, and finishes.2. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections, accepted mock-up can and may be a

part of the construction. If mock-up area is accepted by Architect mock-up may remain as part of the overall construction, if mock-up is not accepted, mock-up will be removed.

N. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished in accordance with requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups of the following rooms:1. None Scheduled.

O. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.

1.12 QUALITY CONTROLA. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.




3. Costs for re-testing and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.C. Contractor’s Responsibilities for Inspection and Testing by the Owner or Owner’s Testing Agent.

1. Schedule and coordinate the activities of the Owner’s Testing Agency within the Project Schedule. Provide adequate time for notice, testing and subsequent reporting. Provide appropriate prior notice to the Owner’s Testing Agency of work requiring the Testing Agency’s observation, sampling or testing.

2. If required by nature of the test, deliver to Owner’s Testing Agency at designated location, adequate Sample of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs and required specifications.

3. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities.

4. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle Samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test Samples.

5. Notify Architect / Engineer and Owner’s Testing Agency 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.

D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections, to perform initial start-up, testing and adjusting of equipment and as required to initiate the Manufacturer’s Warranty. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

E. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, as required to initiate the Manufacturer’s Warranty and submittal of written reports.

F. Retesting / Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including re-testing and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

G. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.1. Coordinate with the Contractor on schedule of observations and testing and access to the

work.




2. Provide appropriate equipment and qualified personnel timely to the progression of the work.

3. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

4. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

5. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

6. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

7. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

8. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.9. Testing Agency does not have authority to stop the work.10. Perform re-testing as required for corrected work or as directed for work suspected to be

deficient.H. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.I. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

J. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of the Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. .1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.13 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: N/AA. Special Tests and Inspections: The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct

special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, as indicated in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in

the Work during performance of its services.




3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.7. Attendance at Construction Meetings as may become necessary.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIESA. Owner’s Testing Agency: As selected and commissioned by the Owner.B. Contractor’s Testing Agency: As selected by the Contractor or Subcontractor and approved by

the Architect and / or Owner.

3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOGA. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.3 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INPECTIONS (IBC – 2015 Section 1705): N/AA. Special Testing will be performed by an Independent Testing Agency working directly for the

Owner in general conformance to Section 1703 and 1704 of the 2015 International Building Code (IBC – 2015) and shall include as a minimum Special Testing of Work performed under the following Sections:1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-place Concrete: Reinforcement Steel Placement Inspection,

Slump Tests, Air Entrainment Tests, Temperature, Acquisition of Samples, Concrete Strength Tests, Hot / Cold Weather Placement Procedures, Compliance with Tolerances, Floor Flatness / Floor Level (FF / FL)

2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry: Mortar Strength Tests, Reinforcing Steel Placement Inspections, Grout Placement Observations, Grout Strength Tests, Hot / Cold Weather Protection Procedures, Mortar joint inspections.

3. Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening: Review of Welding Certificates, Welding Inspections, Inspections of Bolted Connections.

4. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing: Off Site Fabrication Inspection of Custom Built-up Members, Review of Welding Certificates, Welding Inspections, Inspections of Bolted Connections.

5. Division 31 Earth Moving: Proctor Tests, Classification and Analysis on existing and imported soil materials, Proctor & Compaction Tests on in place engineered fill, Proctor & Compaction Tests on existing soil substrate to remain. Anderberg Limit Testing as directed on marginal soils.

B. In addition to above, Site Quality Testing will be performed by an Independent Testing Agency working directly for the Owner and shall include as a minimum Testing of Work performed under the following Sections:1. Section 01 22 00 “Measurement and Payment”: Verification of Unit Prices – Quantities

Used.




2. Section 32 12 16 “Asphalt Paving”: Observation and Testing of Substrate Materials and Preparation, Verification of Thickness Placed, Testing of Samples.

3. Section 32 13 13 “Concrete Paving”: Observation and Testing of Substrate Materials and Preparation, Verification of Thickness Placed, Testing of Samples.

3.4 SELECTION AND PAYMENTA. Testing services of an independent laboratory may be required under one or more of the

following conditions:1. Testing and reporting as provided for in individual sections of the Specifications shall be

arranged for, scheduled, and results reported in a timely manner according to the development of the Work. The responsibility for Special Testing shall be that of the Owner’s Testing Agency, the responsibility for all other testing as specified shall be that of the Contractors and the cost shall be included in the Bid.

2. If, in the course of the Work, questions arise as to the quality of the material, the installation, or any other characteristic of the Work, the Architect, or the Owner, may require additional testing to verify such quality. The Contractor shall comply in a timely manner to arrange for, employ, and aid in the services of an independent testing laboratory. Cost for testing and re-testing under such conditions shall be borne as follows:a. If the Work in question is found to be according to Specifications, the cost of

testing and repairs, if necessary, shall be borne by the Owner.b. If the Work in question is found not to meet Specifications, the cost of initial testing,

as well as all subsequent re-testing, shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all corrective measures as may be required, including damages incurred as a result of non-conforming Work. Such damages may include Claims of delay by other Contractors, Subcontractors, Architect or Engineer, and/or delay in occupancy by the Owner.

B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relive Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

3.5 REPAIR AND PROTECTION:A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.








SECTION 01 50 00CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 19.01 “Existing Conditions Photographs”

1.2 SUMMARYA. Scope of Work:

1. Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this Section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other Contract Documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this Section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary Work required, and no omission from this Section will be recognized as an indication by Architect that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the Work and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Except as otherwise indicated, Contractor may, at his option, provide stand-alone utility plants to provide needed services in lieu of connected services from available public and franchised utilities, provided such stand-alone facilities comply with governing regulations and don't interfere with the Owner's continued use of existing buildings and site.

3. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendations of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction Work.

4. Comply with National Electrical Code.5. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10-Series standards on construction safety,

and applicable Federal Regulations (OSHA).6. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility company

requirements.7. Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for

proper performance of the Work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

8. Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

B. Section Includes::1. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone, water, and sanitary

facilities.2. Temporary Controls: Barriers, protection of the Work, water control and traffic controls.3. Construction Facilities: Hoisting equipment, scaffolds, waste management, progress

cleaning and temporary buildings.4. Security: Protection of buildings and site from vandalism, theft and unauthorized entry.

C. Related Sections:1. Section 00 72 13 - General Conditions – AIA 201-2007: Coordination and Meetings.2. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”3. Section 01 12 00 “Summary of Project”.4. Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”.5. Section 01 73 29 “Cutting & Patching”.6. Section 01 75 00 “Facility Start-Up & Commissioning”.7. Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning”




8. Section 02 41 19 “Selective Structure Demolition for Remodeling”

1.3 LEAD PAINT PROTECTIONA. The Project may include work that may disturb existing lead paint. The Contractor shall perform

such work in accordance with state and local ordinances with trained and certified personnel.B. See Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements relating to Lead Paint:

1. Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a "Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are trained and certified in lead-safe work practices.

2. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the following: a. Chapters 661–69, 661-70 relating to Lead Paint.

1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING: (ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACT) (PRIME CONTRACTOR)

A. For Remodeling within the Existing Building, the Electrical Subcontractor may make use of the existing electrical system. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost of usage from existing permanent service.

B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient to accommodate construction operations, requiring power, use of power tools, electrical heating, lighting, and start-up testing of permanent electric-powered equipment prior to its permanent connection to electrical system. Provide overload protection. Locate so that entire area of construction can be reached by power tools on a single extension cord of 100 foot (30.48M) maximum length.

C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide Temporary Electrical Service of type and duration as required to maintain electrical power to the Building to ensure continued operation of Fire Alarm System, Emergency Exit Lighting, Lighted Exit Signs (Emergency Electrical Panel) and to provide power sufficient for others doing concurrent work for the Owner within the Building during long periods of Electrical Power interruptions. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also maintain telecommunications service in support of the Fire Alarm System Automated Communicator. Brief periods of power interruption not to exceed two days may be acceptable, during which time alternate monitoring and observation or “fire watch” is to be provided by the Contractor.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION: (AS ASSIGNED)A. Areas within existing facilities will be heated and ventilated from existing systems. Mechanical

Subcontractor shall provide connections to existing systems, extend service, and supplement with temporary units as required. Pay all costs of installation, maintenance, operation, and removal. The Owner shall pay costs of fuel consumed by existing permanent systems.

B. Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.

C. Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.

1.6 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SYSTEM: (ALL SUBCONTRACTORS)A. Contractors & Subcontractors may shall provide individual mobile telephones.

1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE: (MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACT)A. The Contractor may make use of owner’s existing water service.




1.8 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES: (GENERAL CONTRACT)A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but is not necessarily limited to,

water distribution, drainage, de-watering equipment, enclosure of Work, hoisting facilities, scaffolding, stairs, ladders, and roads. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

1.9 ENCLOSURE: (EACH CONTRACT AS REQUIRED) N/A

1.10 SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS: (GENERAL CONTRACTOR)A. The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of

limitation, fire protection barricades, warning signs/lights, site enclosure fence, sidewalk bridges, building enclosure/lock-up, environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and Claims for damages at Project Site. Provide security/protection services and systems in coordination with activities and in a manner to achieve 24-hour, 7-day-per-week effectiveness.

B. Security Program:1. Protect Work, existing premises and Owner's operations from theft, vandalism, and

unauthorized entry.2. Initiate program in coordination with Owner's existing security system/program at job

mobilization.3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy or Owner

acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security.C. Entry Control:

1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities.2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.3. All construction personnel shall be identifiable by company uniform or security

badge as issued by the Owner.4. Maintain log of workmen and visitors, make available to Owner on request.

D. Coordinate access of Owner's personnel to site in coordination with Owner's security forces.

1.11 SITE ENCLOSURE FENCE: (GENERAL CONTRACT) N/A

1.12 BUILDING ENCLOSURE AND LOCK-UP: (GENERAL CONTRACT)A. At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when

personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

1.13 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: (GENERAL CONTRACT)A. The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field

offices, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, drinking water, first aid facilities, thermometer, Project identification signs, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonable required for proficient performance of the Work and accommodation of personnel at the site including Owner's and Architect's personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent Work of the Project, only when and in manner authorized by Architect; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of Substantial Completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.

1.14 FIELD OFFICES: (GENERAL CONTRACTOR)A. Contractor's to coordinate with the Owner, meeting space located within the existing building.

Provide access to equipment as required by OSHA including first aid supplies, drinking water, and protective helmets for visitors, employment and safety notices, and storage for construction documents and shop drawings.




1.15 STORAGE SHEDS: (ALL CONTRACTORS – As Required)A. Each Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site, located within construction work area,

watertight sheds with raised floors for the storage of equipment and materials. Sheds to be provided with locks. Semi-trailer may be used if appropriately blocked and “dollied down”. Spread load of dolly downs with sufficient cribbing to prevent damage to lawns and paving.

1.16 PEST CONTROL: (ALL CONTRACTORS)A. Maintain all temporary enclosures, doors and windows for tightness against emigration of

insects, pests and rodents into building.B. Provide tight waterproof containers for food and refuge. Empty and clean on a regular basis.

1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL: (ALL CONTRACTORS) A. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere

from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.18 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES: (GENERAL CONTRACT) A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable

working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual Specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

B. When Owner is providing fuel for temporary heating, provide temporary closures with minimum insulating value not less than 75 percent of final construction.

1.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK: (ALL CONTRACTORS)A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification

sections.B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in

immediate Work area to minimize damage.C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, casework, jambs, sills and soffits of openings.D. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic, dirt wear, damage, or movement of heavy

objects by protecting with durable sheet materials.E. Prohibit work on or over new casework. Prohibit storage of materials, tools or equipment on or

within new casework.F. Prohibit traffic or storage on roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain

recommendation for protection from roofing material manufacturer.G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

1.20 CONSTRUCTION WASTE STORAGE AND REMOVAL: (GENERAL CONTRACTOR)A. Provide commercial type waste containers (dumpsters) for construction waste and debris.

Provide multiple labeled waste containers for sorting of debris as waste and recyclable materials

B. Locate collection container in area designated by Owner.C. Not less often than weekly, legally dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish off site and

off Owner's property.

1.21 PROGRESS CLEANING: (ALL CONTRACTORS)A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, and other closed or remote spaces,

prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from building daily.




E. Locate collection container in area designated by Owner.F. Not less often than weekly, legally dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish off site and

off Owner's property.

1.22 USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS AND FACILITIES: (ALL CONTRACTS) N/A.

1.23 PARKING: (GENERAL CONTRACT)A. Coordinate use of street parking to comply with local ordinances.

1.24 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL: (GENERAL CONTRACT)A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by

emergency vehicles, and Owner's operations.B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles. Maintain vehicular access to and through

parking areas.C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas.

1.25 EXISTING PAVEMENTS AND PARKING AREAS: (ALL CONTRACTS) A. Existing on-site streets and driveways shall not be used for construction traffic except for

lightweight vehicular such as pick-ups, trucks and vans. Tracked vehicles not allowed.B. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

1.26 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES: (GENERAL CONTRACT) N/A







THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY NOT USED



SECTION 01 60 00PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in

Project; products, product delivery, storage, protection and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products (substitutions).

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”2. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.3. Section 01 22 00 “Measurement and Payment” (Unit Prices) for products used in

conjunction with a Unit Price.4. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.5. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.6. Section 01 25 00 “Request for Material & Equipment Substitution”

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. (for alterations or remodeling Work.)

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

4. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.a. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as

specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. (for alterations or remodeling Work.)

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.




1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit written request for consideration of each

comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00

"Submittal Procedures."b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products

for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint

manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where

required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following:a. Name of product and manufacturer.b. Model and serial number.c. Capacity.d. Speed.e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements.

C. For products of a series or multiple applications use similar Products from the same manufacturer.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.




2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.a. The Contractor shall reject and reorder any damaged materials and / or

equipment.5. Upon receipt at the Site the Contractor shall inventory all material, equipment and

accessories to ensure completeness of the shipment, compliance with Approved Shop Drawings and Submittals, and correct colors as per the Approved Project Color Schedule.a. The Contractor shall reject and reorder any non-complying materials and / or

equipment.C. Storage and Protection:

1. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.2. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent

mixing with foreign matter.3. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

4. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Do not overload floor or roof structures beyond design live load. Brace structure as required.

5. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

6. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

7. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

8. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.9. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.10. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection.11. Provide and maintain insurance coverage as required.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIESA. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.




3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURESA. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish

equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide the following: …"2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by the following: …"3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered as provided for below upon written request with supporting documentation.a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide one of the following: …"4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions from other Manufacturers for




Contractor's convenience will be considered as provided for below upon written request with supporting documentation.a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available

manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in

Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide

a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS (SUBSTITUTIONS)A. Requests for Comparable Products (Substitutions) will be in accordance with Document 00 21

13 “Instructions to Bidders” and Document 00 22 13 “Supplementary Instructions to Bidders”.B. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's

request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is

consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.4. Samples, if requested.

C. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.1. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed

Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the bidder:




1. Has reviewed the Proposed use of the Product and have determined it to be an appropriate use and in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.

3. Will provide the same Warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.4. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for

the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.5. Waives Claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become

apparent.6. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by

authorities.E. Comparable Products may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault

of the Contractor.F. Comparable Products will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop

Drawing or Product Data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)




SECTION 01 73 29CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL





d. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions with Modifications and Additions”.e. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”


1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work in existing, remodeled and new Construction.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”: Work by Owner or by separate Contractors.2. Section 01 35 16 “Alteration Project Procedures”3. Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”.4. Section 01 60 00 “Materials and Equipment”: Product Options and Substitutions.5. Individual Product Specification Sections:

a. Cutting and patching incidental to Work of the Section.b. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in Work of those

Sections.c. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

B. Include in request:1. Identification of Project.2. Location and description of affected Work.3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.4. Description of proposed Work, and products to be used.5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.6. Effect on Work of Owner or separate Contractor.7. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.8. Date and time Work will be executed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution

under provisions of Section 01 60 00.


SECTION 01 73 29CUTTING AND PATCHING


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or

movement during cutting and patching.B. After uncovering existing Work, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and

methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering Work.C. Maintain excavations free of water.D. Provide safety barricades and warning devices as required.E. Provide temporary partitions and dust and sound control when required.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work.B. Fit products together, to integrate with other Work.C. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming Work.E. Remove Samples of installed Work for testing when requested.F. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical Work including lintels

as necessary and/or scheduled.G. Openings cut in previously installed work shall be as small as possible to receive new work, and

be crisply cut with well formed edges in defined circular or rectangular shape.

3.4 PERFORMANCEA. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate

surfaces to receive patching and finishing.B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and moisture

resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior

approval.D. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.E. Fit Work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest

intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

3.5 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CUTTING & PATCHING IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION OR PREVIOUSLY FINISHED AREAS

A. Responsibility to make openings, cutting, and patching for mechanical and electrical installations shall be the General Contractors if the work is located in areas where the General Contractor is otherwise scheduled to perform work and that work is not yet accomplished.

B. Responsibility to make openings, cutting and patching for Mechanical and Electrical installations shall be that of the Contractor performing the Work in areas where the General Contractor is not otherwise scheduled to perform Work or where his scheduled Work is already complete.

C. Cutting and patching noted in other specification sections or on the Drawings shall take precedence over the above general description.




SECTION 01 75 00FACILITY START-UP / COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL






1. Starting / re-starting systems.2. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.3. Demonstration and instructions.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 45 00 “Quality Control”: Manufacturers field reports.2. Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout”.3. Section 01 78 23 “Operating & Maintenance Data”.4. Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents”5. Section 01 79 00 “Demonstration and Training”6. Division 26 - Electrical System Commissioning.7. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security Systems Commissiong

1.3 STARTING SYSTEMSA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper operation, or other

conditions which may cause damage.D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those

required by the equipment or system manufacturer.E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative, Contractors'

personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 45 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS (See also Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training”).

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.

C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.


SECTION 01 75 00FACILITY START-UP / COMMISSIONING


E. Demonstrate start-up, programming, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled, agreed-upon times, at equipment location.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when needed for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

1.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING – N/A

1.6 INSPECTION, TESTING & CERTIFICATION OF LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS: (Fire Alarm & Detection, Sprinklers)

A. Inspection, testing and certification of Life Safety Systems shall be performed by manufacturer’s trained technical representatives.

B. System shall be tagged, labeled and dated as required by state code and local ordinance prior to Substantial Completion and Owner Occupancy.

C. Installer shall program and test remote communications prior to Substantial Completion and Owner Occupancy.

D. Installer / Manufacturer’s technical representative shall file test and certification reports with State Fire Marshal’s Office and Local Fire Department.






SECTION 01 77 00CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 65 83 “Contractor Certificates”: Hazardous Materials Exclusion Certificate

b. Document 00 72 13 “General Conditions”c. Document 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”


1. Closeout procedures.2. Final cleaning.3. Adjusting.4. Project Record Documents.5. Spare parts and maintenance materials.6. Consent of Surety7. Final Review of Account8. Final Application for Payment

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”: Procedures.2. Section 01 45 00 “Quality Control”: Construction photographs.3. Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls”: Progress cleaning.4. Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”.5. Section 01 78 36 “Warranties and Bonds”

1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been

inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. Submit signed completed Final Punchlist.

B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities, including occupancy permit.

C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, including all change orders, previous payments, and sum remaining due including retainage. Application shall be accompanied by final lien waivers as may be outstanding and Consent of Surety to pay same.

D. Owner will occupy all or portions of the building as specified in Section 01 11 00.

1.4 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.D. Replace filters in and service operating equipment.E. Relamp new light fixtures used during construction period and clean lenses.F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.H. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.




1.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIESA. Contractor shall repair all damage to existing site development, building components, systems,

and/or finishes due to construction activities to conditions prior to commencement of the Work.

1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Maintain on site, one set of the following Record Documents; record actual revisions to the

Work:1. Contract Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. (Retained by Architect during

review process)6. Construction photographs.

B. Store Record Documents separate from Documents used for construction.C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products

installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first or main floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

F. Delete Architect/Engineer title block and seal from all Documents.G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer prior to Claim for final Application for Payment.

1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide Products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in

individual Specification Sections.B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner's representative; obtain receipt

prior to final payment.C. Submit Maintenance and Operation Manuals as specified.

1.9 FINAL REVIEW OF ACCOUNTA. Submit a final statement of accounting to Architect. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to

the Contract Sum including:1. Original Contract sum2. Additions and deductions resulting from:

a. Previous change ordersb. Allowancesc. Deductions for uncorrected Workd. Deductions for liquidated damagese. Deductions for re-inspection paymentsf. Deductions for extra services of the Architect.




g. Other adjustments;3. Total Contract sum (as adjusted)4. Previous payments5. Sum remaining due

1.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTA. Contractor shall submit final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and

requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract. Application shall be noted as "final payment" request.

1.11 CONSENT OF SURETYA. A.I.A. Document G707 - Contractor shall submit to Owner as part of Contract closeout

accompanied by request for final payment. Consent of Surety Document shall be as required and provided by contractor's Surety Company.

B. Final payment will not be made without this documentation.

1.12 LIEN WAIVERSA. Submit complete and final lien waivers from all major subcontractors and major suppliers as

identified on the approved List of Subcontractors and Suppliers, as a minimum.

1.13 MANUFACTURERS EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS AND MATERIAL WARRANTIESB. Submit executed, signed and dated warranties for all equipment, systems and material as

specified in individual sections.

1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EXCLUSION CERTIFICATEA. Prepare and submit Contractor’s statement certifying no materials or equipment incorporated in

the work contained asbestos or other hazardous material and that no existing hazardous material or asbestos was disturbed during the course of the Work.

B. Hazardous Material Exclusion Statement shall be signed and dated by the Contractor and be notarized.

1.14 FIRE SAFETY SUBMITTALS TO THE STATE OF IOWAA. Fire Detection & Alarm Systems

1. Provide for and submit a copy of Final Inspection & Certification of the completed and installed system for submittal to State of Iowa Fire Marshal’s Office as required by regulation.

2. Submit corrected systems manufacturer’s shop drawings and installation drawings and product literature as installed for submittal to the State of Iowa Fire Marshal’s Office as required by regulation.

1.15 ON SITE CLOSEOUT ITEMS:A. Y / N : Perform final construction cleaning.B. Y / N : Remove all temporary facilities, equipment and tools (Demobilize from Site).C. Y / N : Repair any damage to existing conditions due to construction activities.D. Y / N : Provide Owner with extra materials as specified and agreed.

Owner to sign receipt acknowledgement.E. Y / N : Conduct Owner Training on New Building Systems and Equipment.

Access Controls, Video Surveillance SystemsF. Y / N : Perform 1 year repair, correction and adjustment itemsG. Y / N : Facilitate extended warranty repair, correction, adjustment and or replacement.

1.16 ADMINISTRATIVE CLOSEOUT ITEMS:A. Y / N : Sign and Return Signed Copies of Certificate of Substantial Completion B. Y / N : Submit final Change Order Pricing




C. Y / N : Submit executed final Change Order D. Y / N : Prepare and Issue Notice of Request for Final Payment to Subcontractors & Suppliers E. Y / N : Prepare and Submit Final Lien Waivers from all Subcontractors and SuppliersF. Y / N : Prepare and Submit Consent of Surety to Final PaymentG. Y / N : Prepare and Submit Final Request for PaymentH. Y / N : Prepare and Submit “As Built” Record DrawingsI. Y / N : Prepare and Submit Owner Operation and Maintenance ManualsJ. Y / N : Prepare and Submit WarrantiesK. Y / N : Sign and Submit Hazardous Materials Exclusion CertificateL. Y / N : Sign and Submit Certified Completed Punch List(s)M. Y / N : Submit signed Receipt(s) of Extra MaterialsN. Y / N : Submit signed Acknowledgement(s) of Owner TrainingO. Y / N : Submit completed and signed Iowa State Sales Tax Refund Forms as specified,

if required.P. Y / N : Provide to Owner’s representative all invoices, shipping manifests, or other

documentation as may be required to support owner’s application for utility rebate.Q. Y / N : Resolution by the Owner to Accept the Project as complete.R. Y / N : Elapse of the statutory 30 day waiting period from Owner’s acceptance for

Subcontractor and Supplier claims.S. Y / N : Final PaymentT. Y / N : Administer 1 year repair, correction and adjustment itemsU. Y / N : Facilitate warranty repair, correction, adjustment and or replacement.






SECTION 01 78 23OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals.2. Emergency manuals.3. Systems and equipment operation manuals.4. Product, Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.5. Warranties and Bonds

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 11 00 "Summary of Project" for coordinating operation and maintenance

manuals covering the Work of single contracts.2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals3. Section 01 45 00 “Quality Requirements and Testing and Inspecting Services”4. Section 01 60 00 “Product Requirements” Systems demonstration.5. Section 01 75 00 “Facility Start-Up / Commissioning”6. Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout” Contract Closeout Procedures 7. Section 01 78 36 “Product Record Documents (Warranties and Bonds)”8. Section 01 79 00 “Demonstration and Training”9. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance

data.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as

specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.1. Architect / Engineer will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance

submittals is acceptable.2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect by uploading to web-based project software site, file sharing site or by email to Architect. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. (Optional) Submit three paper copies. Architect will return two copies.C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Architect / Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect / Engineer will return copy with comments.



TSP, Inc. © 01 78 23 2/6 06190256.00DDS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

E. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary

to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate

section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:1. Title page.2. Table of contents.




3. Manual contents.B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.7. Name and contact information for Architect.8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUALA. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to

operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system.

For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and

maintenance manual.

1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALSA. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:1. Fire.2. Power failure.3. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.




D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALSA. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating

operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an

instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents.2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.




E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification.

1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating

maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an

instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product

or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not

available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.




G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

A. Warranties and Bonds: Obtain Warranties and Bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or Work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of Warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined.1. Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that

would affect validity of warranties or bonds.2. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.3. Verify that Documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.4. Co-execute submittals when required.5. Retain Warranties and Bonds until time specified for submittal.

B. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)END OF SECTION 01 78 23



SECTION 01 78 39PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,

including the following:1. Record Drawings. (“As-Builts”)2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 01 11 00 "Project Summary" for coordinating project record documents.2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for final property survey.3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.4. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.3) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots.4) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of

prints.3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.c. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file

plots.3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information

were recorded.B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one set of annotated PDF electronic files of

Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one set of annotated PDF electronic files and

directories of each submittal.1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-

keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and one set of annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.




E. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGSA. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.4. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings

for use in recording information.a. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements

related to use of Architect's digital data files.b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate

layers.




C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable

paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect.e. Name of Contractor.

1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONSA. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where

applicable.B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF

electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATAA. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF

electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

1.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALSA. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.




1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the

Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

END OF SECTION - 01 78 39



SECTION 01 79 00DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,

including the following:1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Demonstration and training video recordings.

B. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the demonstration and training allowance as specified in Section 01 21 00 "Allowances."

C. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. See requirements in Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."1. Related Sections

a. Section 01 75 00 “Facility Start-Up Commissioning”b. Section 01 78 23 “ Operation and Maintenance Data (Warranties and Bonds)”c. Section 01 78 39 “Project R3ecord Documents”

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator, instructor and/or videographer.C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of

each training module.1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.b. Name and address of videographer.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to




corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance

personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.3. Review required content of instruction.4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,

and course content.C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect.

1.7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAMA. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for

each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.c. Operating standards.d. Regulatory requirements.e. Equipment function.f. Operating characteristics.g. Limiting conditions.h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:a. Emergency manuals.




b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.d. Product maintenance manuals.e. Project Record Documents.f. Identification systems.g. Warranties and bonds.h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.b. Instructions on stopping.c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:a. Startup procedures.b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.c. Routine and normal operating instructions.d. Regulation and control procedures.e. Control sequences.f. Safety procedures.g. Instructions on stopping.h. Normal shutdown instructions.i. Operating procedures for emergencies.j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:a. Alignments.b. Checking adjustments.c. Noise and vibration adjustments.d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:a. Diagnostic instructions.b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:a. Inspection procedures.b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.d. Procedures for routine cleaning.e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.f. Procedures for routine maintenance.g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:a. Diagnosis instructions.b. Repair instructions.c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.




1.8 PREPARATIONA. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

1.9 INSTRUCTIONA. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to

coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance

notice.D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of an oral demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site or give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGSA. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training

video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and

lesson outline.B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a

digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology.1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive or by uploading to web-based

Project software site.2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual

table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video

segment, as identified in Project specifications.4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for

inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents:a. Name of Contractor/Installer.b. Business address.c. Business phone number.d. Point of contact.e. Email address.




C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents.c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while or dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.

H. Option: As option to video recording of instructional sessions above, provide Manufacturer’s tutorials via thumb drive or website access. Tutorials, under this option to have project relevant content and not generic in nature of content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION






DIVISION 02 – EXISITNG CONDITIONS


SECTION 02 41 19SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 21 “Information Available to Bidders”: Site Survey, Geotechnical

Report, Asbestos Survey and Test Report, Lead Paint Inspection and Test Report


1. Selective Demolition notices and permits, as required.2. Removal and disposal of designated existing construction.3. Removal, storage, protection of existing elements designated to be recovered and

reinstalled in the subsequent new work.4. Removal and storage, at direction of the Owner, of items as designated to be returned to

Owner.5. Refer to items as indicated on Drawings.6. See Schedule this Section Part 3.

B. Related Sections1. Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions, Coordination and Meetings”.2. Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions”3. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project” 4. Section 01 23 00 “Alternates”5. Section 01 35 16 “Alteration Project Procedures”.6. Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements”7. Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls”: Temporary

enclosures. Cleanup during construction.8. Section 01 73 29 “Cutting & Patching”.9. Section 01 77 00 “Contract Closeout”: Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 73 29 Submittals for submittal requirements regarding alteration of structural

members.

1.4 ALLOWANCES:A. See Section 01 21 00 “Allowances” for Allowances relating to the Work of this Section to be

included in the Base Bid.

1.5 UNIT PRICES:A. See Section 01 22 00 “Unit Price and Measurement” for provisions for Unit Prices or additional

work based on Unit Price Change Order.

1.6 ALTERNATES:A. See Section 01 23 00 “Alternates” for Alternates relating to the Work of this Section.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00.B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions and new fill areas.

DIVISION 02- EXISTING CONDITIONS



1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to applicable State and / or Municipal codes for Demolition Work, safety of structure,

hazardous materials, lead paint, dust control and debris disposal.1. IAC - Iowa Administrative Code 661 (applicable sections). Including but not limited to the

following: a. Chapters 661–69, 661-70 relating to Lead Paint.

1) Those dealing with Lead Paint shall have required training and certification for disturbance and / or removal.

b. Other regulations involving:1) Refuse disposal2) Fuel storage and piping3) Demolition

2. No demolition by explosives is allowed.3. Debris disposal on site is not allowed.4. Burning demolition debris is not allowed.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities. Those dealing with Lead Paint shall have required training and certification for disturbance and / or removal.

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting Work and comply with their requirements.D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits.E. Maintain emergency access and egress from adjacent occupied buildings.F. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 day prior written notice to

the Owner. Under such interruption or disturbance, provide equivalent life safety provisions.G. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials.

1.9 SEQUENCINGA. Refer to Sequence of Work under the provisions of Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Project”.

B. Sequence activities to demolish the Work in the following order:1. Prepare and submit bonds and insurance.2. Obtain and pay for all required State and Local Permits3. Prepare and submit all notices to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).4. Mobilize to site.5. Verify existing conditions are as represented on the Drawings.6. Identify and locate utilities and services.7. Secure site by providing additional fencing, gates, barricades, signs, warning devices and

lights, as necessary.8. Isolate, cap, disconnect, and/or re-route utilities and mechanical and electrical systems

as required to allow continued services to portions of existing building to remain.9. Construct temporary walls and enclosures as necessary.10. Determine, mark and establish demolition limits.11. Perform salvage for the Owner as scheduled.12. Perform salvage of items for re-installation.13. Perform contractor salvage.14. Begin demolition.15. Seal, cap and close abandoned mechanical/electrical openings. Patch to match adjacent

materials and finishes.16. Perform cutting and patching as scheduled for adjacent construction to remain.17. Coordinate access to and removal of hazardous materials to be removed by Others.18. Perform new construction as scheduled.19. Secure, block, cover and store salvaged items to be stored outside as scheduled.20. Secure and store, as directed by Owner, items to be stored inside other areas of existing

buildings scheduled to remain.




1.10 SCHEDULINGA. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 00 72 13 “General Conditions” - Project

Schedules. B. Schedule Work as appropriate to Owner’s use and occupancy, equipment on site and

reinstallation of salvage.C. Describe anticipated demolition removal procedures and schedule.D. Coordinate and schedule access to and removal of hazardous materials to be removed by

Others.E. Perform work between the hours of 8:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. weekdays and Saturdays 10:00 a.m.

to 6:00 p.m. No demolition work allowed on Sundays.

1.11 SALVAGEA. Salvage by the Owner prior to Construction:

1. Prior to Construction, the Owner shall perform salvage of items easily removed including supplies, files, window treatments, and loose furniture, fixtures and equipment.

B. Salvage by Contractor for Owner:1. The Contractor shall carefully remove all items tagged or noted for salvage by the

Contractor for the Owner.2. The Contractor shall remove tagged items complete with all associated accessories,

mounting elements and other incidentals and package with the primary salvaged items.a. Note and / or photograph existing installation as reference for reinstallation.

3. The Contractor shall store Owner’s salvage as directed by the Owner on site or within the existing building scheduled to remain.

4. The Contractor shall protect all items designated as Owner’s salvage from damage due to demolition or construction.

C. Salvage by the Contractor for re-installation into the Project or Subsequent Project.1. The Contractor shall carefully remove all items tagged or noted for salvage by the

Contractor for reinstallation into the Project.2. The Contractor shall remove items designated for reinstallation complete with all

associated accessories, mounting elements and other incidentals and package with the primary salvaged items. Label all components and accessories and make notes, sketches and photographs as required to ensure complete and accurate reinstallation.

3. The Contractor shall store items salvaged for reinstallation on site, within the existing building or as otherwise directed by the Owner. Provide weather tight and secure storage for all small items, items of value and any component not normally exposed to the weather in it’s installed condition.

4. The Contractor shall protect all items designated for reinstallation from damage due to demolition or construction.

D. Salvage by the Contractor:1. The Contractor assumes all rights, ownership and responsibility for salvage of items

scheduled to be demolished and not tagged or identified as Owner’s salvage or for reinstallation.

2. The Contractor shall not cause the continuation of project progress to be adversely affected by contractor’s salvage.

3. Contractor’s salvage shall be removed from the site daily subsequent to demolition or removal.

4. Sale of salvaged material on site shall be limited per paragraph 3.6.5. The Contractor shall not allow direct on site salvage, demolition or removal of items by

anyone other than his own personnel in direct performance of their project duties.6. The Contractor shall not damage adjacent materials, finishes, or existing conditions

scheduled to remain in an effort to maximize contractor salvage.7. Salvage and re-sale by the Contractor shall result in financial benefit to the Owner in the

value of the Contract.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPAIR MATERIALSA. See Section 01 73 29 “Cutting & Patching”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Prevent spread of dust, odors and noise as specified in Section 01 50 00.B. Protect existing materials, equipment and finishes which are not to be demolished.

3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTSA. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent, previously finished and occupied

building areas.B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect / Engineer.

Do not resume operations until directed.C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work.D. Except where noted otherwise, remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury

materials on site.E. Remove demolished materials from site as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave

areas in clean condition.F. Remove temporary Work.G. Comply with all Federal, State and Local ordinances when disturbing or removing lead paint.

Those conducting such operations shall have appropriate training and certification.

3.3 DEMOLITIONA. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect

as required. B. Remove demolished materials from site and legally dispose.

3.4 DEMOLITION SCHEDULE (Demolition includes but is not necessarily limited to the following)A. Removal of designated existing construction.B. Refer to items as indicated on Drawings.C. Sitework: N/AD. General Contract:

1. Remove Hardware as shown on the drawings.2. Cut new openings in exterior and interior walls as need for routing cable

E. Mechanical – HVAC: N/AF. Mechanical – Plumbing: N/AG. Mechanical – Sprinkler System: N/AH. Electrical:

1. Remove existing access controls & Security components as scheduled.

3.5 SALVAGE SCHEDULES:A. Owner Salvage:

1. Owner shall, prior to commencement of work in areas as appropriate, perform Owner salvage and remove all moveable supplies, materials, equipment, furnishings, accessories and other incidentals to be retained by the Owner.

2. After performance of Owner salvage, the Owner shall tag or otherwise label all items in area of scheduled demolition to be salvaged by the Contractor and returned to the Owner.




B. Contractor’s Salvage for the Owner1. All Contractors shall perform salvage for the Owner of major elements as scheduled and

noted on the Drawings.2. All Contractors shall perform salvage for the Owner of minor elements that may be

tagged and labeled by the Owner.3. Salvage by the General Contractor for the Owner may include but is not limited to the

following:a. Door Hardware not otherwise scheduled for reinstallation

4. Salvage by the Mechanical Contractor for the Owner may include but is not limited to the following:a. None

5. Salvage by the Sprinkler Contractor for the Owner may include but is not limited to the following:a. None

6. Salvage by the Electrical Contractor for the Owner may include but is not limited to the following:a. Access Control & Security Components (not scheduled for reinstallation)

C. Contractor salvage of materials and equipment for reinstallation into new construction shall be as shown on the Drawings and as discussed at the Pre-Bid Conference and Pre-Construction Conference.1. Contractors shall be responsible for means and methods in removing elements for

reinstallation, and to make secure and safe the areas where elements were removed.2. Contractors shall be responsible for proper handling and storage of existing elements

removed for reinstallation.a. Disassembly of existing systems, equipment, or construction may include drawings

or photographs of existing conditions, labeling of various parts their use and respective positions, and labeling of all fasteners and connections.

b. All elements removed for reinstallation shall include all accessories, fasteners and incidentals.

c. Existing elements shall be blocked, leveled, covered, stored and protected from detrimental effects of weather and construction activity.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible to repair or replace all existing elements scheduled to be removed, disassembled, relocated and reinstalled, damaged or lost during construction activities.

4. Existing elements to be salvaged, removed, protected from damage, stored and reinstalled under this Project are as noted on the drawings and include the following:a. Site work:

1) No Itemsb. General Work:

1) Door Hardware as scheduled including openers and controls.c. Mechanical Work – Plumbing:

1) No Itemsd. Mechanical Work - HVAC:

1) Diffusers where notede. Life Safety – Sprinkler

1) Nonef. Electrical Work

1) Access Control & Surveillance Camera system components

3.6 CONTRACTORS SALVAGE:A. The Contractor shall have salvage rights to all items scheduled for demolition and removal and

not identified for Owner's salvage, Contractor's salvage for the Owner, items scheduled to be




removed and stored for reinstallation or items scheduled to be removed and returned to Owner's stock.

B. Salvage operations by others, not including the Owner, shall be considered a Subcontractor and therefore shall be covered by the Contractor's bonds and insurance.

C. Contractor salvaged items may be resold at Contractor's option from the project site storage area. During the project time period and only during normal working hours.1. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for site access and presence by others

removing salvaged material.2. Contractor shall provide liability insurance coverage for others removing salvaged

materials.3. Contractor shall assume all responsibility that all demolition material including

Contractor's salvage is removed from the site by project completion and/or legally disposed of.

4. Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits required for resale of salvage material.

5. It is intended that the final benefits of Contractor's salvage be reflected in his contract price to the Owner, but Contractor's salvage shall not be allowed to impede the progress of the work nor extend the project completion date.


DIVISION 6 – WOOD & PLASTICS

TSP, Inc. © 06 10 53 - 1/4 06190256.00JWS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/042019

SECTION 06 10 53MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.1. Document 00 31 19 “Existing Conditions”: 2. Section 01 41 00 “Regulatory Requirements” for use of Fire Treated Wood


1. Wood blocking and nailers.2. Wood furring.3. Plywood equipment backing panels.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 07 53 23 “(EPDM) Roofing – Adhered & Ballasted” - for nailers and blocking2. Section 07 71 00 “Manufactured Roof Specialties”3. Section 09 22 16 “Non-Structural Metal Wall Framing”4. Section 09 29 00 “Gypsum Board Systems”

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood.2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.3. Power-driven fasteners.4. Metal framing anchors.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERALA. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and

provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.



TSP, Inc. © 06 10 53 - 2/4 06190256.00JWS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET 09/04/2019

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALSA. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALSA. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Framing for raised platforms.2. Concealed blocking.3. Roof framing and blocking.4. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in

connection with roofing.5. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBERA. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following: Blocking, Nailers, Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs, Cants, Furring, & Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.




C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELSA. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness

indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERSA. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this article for material and manufacture.1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, length as

recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.2. KC Metals Products, Inc.3. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.4. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying

with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801862&mf=04&src=wd







C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96

inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATIONA. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATIONA. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required

for tolerance of finish work.


DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

TSP, Inc. © 07 84 13 - 1/6 06190256.00JWS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR BID 09/042019

SECTION 07 84 13PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RLATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary




d. Document 00 73 02 “General Work Requirements”e. Document 00 73 03 “Special Work Requirements


1. Installation of firestopping and firesafing systems in accordance with the IBC, ‘International Building Code’ Chapter 7.a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.c. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry”2. Section 04 21 13 “Brick Masonry”3. Section 09 22 16 “Non-Structural Metal Wall Framing”4. Section 09 29 00 “Gypsum Board Systems”5. Division 22 “Plumbing Construction”: Piping & ductwork penetrations.6. Division 23 “HVAC Construction”: Piping & ductwork penetrations.7. Division 26 “Electrical Construction”: Conduit penetrations, recessed boxes, & panel

boards.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including Product test reports.B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in

compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its

"Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements:1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL.2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in

"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.


SECTION 07 84 13JOINT SEALANTS

TSP, Inc. © 07 92 00 - 2/6 06190256.00JWS 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR BID 09/04/2019

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Hilti, Inc2. Grace Construction Products.3. 3M Fire Protection Products.4. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.5. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPINGA. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls fire-barrier walls smoke-barrier walls and fire

partitions.2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of

roof/ceiling assemblies.2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per

UL 1479.1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening

at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested

according to UL 1479.F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.c. Fire-rated form board.d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.3. Substrate primers.4. Collars.5. Steel sleeves.




2.3 FILL MATERIALSA. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming

materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.




B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.3 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels

permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.4. Date of installation.5. Manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and

with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.5 UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMA. Fire Stopping Systems, System Identification.

1. Non Penetrating items 0001-09992. Metallic Pipes, Conduit or Tubing 1001-19993. Nonmetallic Pipes, Conduit or Tubing 2001-29994. Electrical Cables 3001-39995. Cable, Trays with Electric Cables 4001-49996. Insulated Pipes 5001-59997. Electrical Bussduct Penetrations 6001-69998. Mechanical Bussduct Penetrations 7001-79999. Multiple penetrations Thru Common Openings 8000-8999

B. Construction Penetration:1. F – Floor Penetration2. W – Wall Penetration3. C – Either Floor or Wall Penetration

C. Type of construction:1. A – Concrete floors equal to or less than 5” thick2. B – Concrete floors greater than 5” thick3. J – Concrete or Masonry walls equal to or less than 8” thick4. K – Concrete or Masonry walls greater than 8” thick5. L – Framed walls

D. Fire-Resistant Joint System (Non Penetrating Items)1. FF – Floor to Floor2. WW – Wall to Wall3. FW – Floor to Wall




4. HW – Head to WallE. Movement Capability

1. D – Has movement capability

3.6 SCHEDULEA. Penetration firestopping, UL-Classifications are to be selected by the Contractor.

1. Where UL-classified systems refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Refer to Structural documents to confirm the number and size of structural framing penetrations through rated walls.

C. Refer to Mechanical documents to confirm the number and size of penetrations through rated walls and floors. May Include:1. Waste and Vent Piping2. Hydronic Piping3. Steam/Condensate supply and return piping4. Water supply and return piping5. HVAC Ductwork6. Controls conduit

D. Refer to Electrical documents to confirm the number and size of penetrations through rated walls and floors. May Include:1. Conduit2. low voltage, communications conduit3. Low voltage conduit sleeves









PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1. Silicone joint sealants.2. Urethane joint sealants.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 08 51 13 “Aluminum Windows”.2. Section 08 54 13 “Fiberglass Windows”.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTINGA. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.C. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.

E. Product test reports.F. Warranties.

1.5 WARRANTYA. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or

replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERALA. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match Architect's samples and/or As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Including Clear.




2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTSA. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. BASF Building Systems.b. Dow Corning Corporation.c. Pecora Corporation.d. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.e. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M).3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS).4. Class: 25.5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTSA. Urethane Joint Sealant ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. BASF Building Systems.b. Pecora Corporation.c. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.d. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M).3. Grade: Pourable (P) or nonsag (NS).4. Class: 25.5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKINGA. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.




B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between

sealants and backs of joints.D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.E. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 CLEANINGA. Clean Work under provisions of 01 77 00.B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORKA. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 50 00.B. Protect sealants until cured.

3.5 SCHEDULEA. Silicon Joint Sealants

1. Interior Applications: a. Other miscellaneous interior joints subject to moisture.

B. Urethane Joint Sealants1. Exterior Applications:

a. Masonry control and expansion joints.b. Joints around window systems

2. Interior Applications: a. Joints around widnow systems.b. Other joints as indicated.






DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS


SECTION 08 71 00DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



a. Document 00 31 19 – “Existing Conditions”: b. Document 00 31 21 – “Information Available to Bidders”: Construction Drawings

and Shop Drawings for previous projects for matching materials.


1. Hardware for hollow metal and solid core wood interior doors.2. Hardware for hollow metal and Aluminum Exterior doors.3. Electronic door hardware for access control.4. Installation

B. Related Sections:1. Document 00 31 19 – Existing Conditions2. Section 28 33 00 – Security Management System and devices

1.3 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 00 72 13 – General Conditions and 00 73 00

Supplementary Conditions.B. Coordinate the Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of

internal reinforcement for door hardware.C. It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to ensure coordination of all hardware

specified. Should conflicts arise in the design, they shall recommend alternative solutions.D. Conflicts in hardware systems or preparation for these systems in the field will be resolved by

the supplier at no cost to the Owner.E. All related alternates shall be coordinated with all other hardware systems shown.

1.4 REFERENCESA. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act with ADAAG.B. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by

Physically Handicapped People.C. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows.D. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute – Quality Standards.E. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.F. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.G. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.H. UL 305 – Panic Hardware.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCEA. Prior to commencing Work, under provisions of Section 00 72 13 – General Conditions.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Provide as per provisions of Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements.B. Conform to applicable NFPA-80 code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and

frames.

1.7 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.




B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Submit Manufacturer’s parts lists, templates.D. Provide Product / Technical Data.E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention and adjustment.

1.8 ALLOWANCESA. See Section 01 21 00 – Allowances for Allowances relating to the Work of this Section to be

included in the Base Bid.1. Allowance No. 1: Door Hardware: $2,500.00 for additional Electronic Door Hardware.2. Allowance No. 2: Security Management System: $2,500.00 for additional Electronic

Door Hardware

1.9 UNIT PRICESA. See Section 01 22 00 – Unit Price and Measurement for provisions for Unit Prices or additional

work based on Unit Price Change Order.

1.10 ALTERNATESA. See Section 01 23 00 Alternates for Alternates relating to the Work of this Section.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements:

1. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.

2. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act & ADAAG – Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines.

3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.4. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors & Other Opening Protections.5. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.12 QUALIFICATIONSA. Provide under provisions of Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.C. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with ten (10)

years documented experience, approved by manufacturer.D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in

the Work of this Section.E. Hardware Installer: Installer to be trained and approved by Manufacturer and must have

performed installations of the same scale in the last three (3) years.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.B. Receive at site and store in Manufacturer’s original unopened packaging.C. Inspect materials for damage, reject damaged material and re-order.D. Inspect materials for compliance with approved shop drawings and submittals and project

requirements. Reject non-complying materials and re-order.E. Inspect materials for colors, finishes and accessories per approved submittals. Reject non-

complying materials and re-order.F. Verify materials include manufacturer’s installation instructions.G. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to

match hardware schedule.H. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00 – Contract Closeout.




B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master and individual and alike key code.

1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 78 23 Operation & Maintenance Data.B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and

inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

1.16 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 77 00 – Contract Closeout.B. Provide two keys per lockset.

1.17 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01 78 23 – Operation & Maintenance Data.B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

1.18 WARRANTYA. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout and 10 78 36 –

Warranties and BondsB. Warranty: Include manufacturer’s standard warranty coverage for door closers, latch/locksets,

panic hardware and butts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:A. Butts/Hinges: McKinney, Stanley, Bommer, B. Power Transfer: McKinney, Penko, Stanley, LockneticsC. Latch, Locksets, Cylinders: Yale, Sargent, Schlage, Falcon, DormaD. Closers: LCN 4041, Yale, Sargent 281, Dorma.E. Exit Devices: Yale, Von Duprin, Sargent, Dorma.F. Automatic Openers: Horton, Dor-o-matic, Sargent, Stanley, Besam.G. Electric Strike: HES, RCI, Locknetics, Von DuprinH. Card Reader: SchlegeI. Overhead Holders: Glynn-Johnson, Sargent, Rixson, Rockwood.J. Coordinators: Glynn-Johnson, RockwoodK. Stops/Wall Bumper: Ives, Glynn-Johnson, Rockwood.L. Head & Jamb Seal: Reese, Pemko.M. Kickplate: Rockwood Industries, Quality, BrooklineN. Weatherstripping & Smoke Sealants: Reese, Penco, National Guard Products.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS: Submit under provisions of Sections 01 25 00 / 01 60 00.

2.3 SYMBOLS: Symbols used in schedule to identify manufacturer:

MANUFACTURER SYMBOL1. Dorma DOR2. Glynn-Johnson GJ3. Falcon FA4. Horton H5. HES HES6. HID HID7. Honeywell HW8. Ives IVES9. LCN LCN10. Locknetics LKN11. McKinney MK




12. NT Quality NTQ13. Pemko P14. Reese RE15. Rixson RX16. Rockwood Industries (Quality) RW17. Sargent SAR18. Schlage SCH19. Securitron S20. Stanley ST21. Von Duprin VD22. Yale Y

2.4 FINISHES; Verify to match existing

2.5 KEYINGA. All scheduled locks to be coordinated with owner’s existing master keyed system. Field verify

at each site.B. Detailed keying schedule will be provided by Owner/Architect post-bid.C. Provide separate construction keying system for contractor’s use during construction.D. If other locks are furnished they will be keyed to existing master key system set up for the

owner previously. The exterior cylinders will be a security key.E. Coordinate a keying meeting with owner and hardware subcontractor.

2.6 KEY CABINET – Not ApplicableA. Provide pre-finished metal key cabinet with piano hinge and cam lock with hooks and labels for

a minimum of twelve (12) keys.

2.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (as Basis for specification)A. Lockset Series (standard & Electric): Sargent FW heavy duty mortise 10 Series, LL trim; or

Yale heavy duty 5400(LN) Series FW lever locksets, Pacific Beach (PB) lever; or Schlage ND Series with Vandlgard Sparta Lever; orDorma CL870-L-LLC Series or Falcon T series with Quatum Lever.1. All locksets to be “FW” or free wheeling lever when locked.

B. Exit Devices (standard & Electric): Sargent 8800 RIM Exit Devices for Single of Doors/ 8700 Vertical Rod Exit Devices for Pairs of Doors, LL trim, L rose & L lever, Yale 1520D / 1530 Series w/Pacific Beach (PB) lever or Dorma F9400 Series.

C. Closers: LCN 4041 Super Smooth, Sargent 281 Series Powerglide or Yale 4400 Series, or Dorma 8900 Series

D. Butt/Hinge Size & Type:1. Unless otherwise scheduled: 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” (114.3mm x 114.3mm), ball bearing, five

knuckle, non-rising pin.2. Where 180º swing or wide throw required: 4-1/2” x 6-1/2” (114.3mm x 165.1mm), ball

bearing, five knuckle, non-rising pin.E. Closure Locations: All doors that open off public spaces such as corridors and lobby areas

shall have door closers with parallel arms mounted on room side where possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 00 72 13 – General Conditions.B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as indicated on

Shop Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Installation personnel must be skilled with knowledge of product and installation methods.




3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that installation has been

furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified.

3.4 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust Work under provisions of Section 01 77 00 – Contract Closeout.B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORKA. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 50 00 Construction Facilities and

Temporary Controls.B. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage hardware or finish.

SCHEDULE 1 - DOOR HARDWARE

Note: Door hardware below has been scheduled as to have panic devices and latch sets match the hardware provided via the most recent project where significant amounts of door hardware were provided as follows:

Anson Elementary School (AES): scheduled as Yale (Satin Chrome / SS) Sargent (Elev)Fisher Elementary School (FiES: scheduled as Yale (Satin Chrome / SS)Franklin Elementary School (FrES): scheduled as Yale (Satin Chrome / SS)Hoglan Elementary School (HES): scheduled as Yale (Satin Chrome / SS) Sargent (2004 Add.)Rogers Elementary School (RES): scheduled as Yale (Satin Brass)Woodbury Elementary School (WES): scheduled as Yale (Satin Brass)SSC / MLA: scheduled as Yale (Satin Chrome / SS)Lenihan Intermediate School (LIS) : scheduled as Schlage / VonDupren (Satin Chrome / SS)Miller Middle School (MMS): scheduled as Yale ’06 / Sargent ‘07 (Satin Chrome / SS)Marshalltown High School (MHS): scheduled as Falcon / VonDupren

(Satin Chrome / SS

ALL DOORs Coordinate rough in and wiring for electronic door hardware, automatic openers, access

controls and security management systems with Electrical Subcontractor under Division 26, 27 & 28 to make power and signal connections for a complete and operational system

Coordinate intercom and Card Reader with local area surveillance camera provided under Section 28 33 00




Anson Elementary School

Anson #AE - 00: Existing Hardwired Access Control Head End EquipmentSalvage and Return to Owner

Headend Equipment Fire Rating: None

Doors: DR-1, DR-2, Dr-7 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Site Control Unit (SCU): one ea. MillenniumX Door Control Boards (DCB): two ea. MillenniumX Power Supply w/ Cabinet (PS): one ea. MillenniumX Site Ethernet Interface (SEI) one ea. Millennium

Anson #AE - 01: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors – Electronically OperatedAutomatic Opener / Card Reader / Electronic Latch Bolt Retraction

30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Full Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: AE-DR-2 LH / RHR: AE-DR-1

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 3 ea. Existing to Remain X Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one DR-01 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one DR-02 9600-630-LBM (Match Exist.) US32D HESX Controller & Power Supply: Existing to be removed and replaced.N Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: (Stop / Hold) one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28X Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX White Plas.Div 28 X Door Opener: one DR-01 Existing to remain




Anson #AE - 02: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: DR-3/4 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: two ea. Existing to RemainN Electric Hinges: one ea. T4A3386 – QC US26D MKX Exit Devices (CVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (CVR) one ea. El 3547A L-17 US26D VDN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: (Stop / Hold) one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP - HWN Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Anson #AE - 03: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: AE-DR-5, AE-DR-6, AE-DR-7 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) DR-7 Existing to RemainX Exit Device (CVR) DR-5, DR-6 - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Device (Rim) DR-5, DR-6 2090 Crossbar US26D FAX Electronic Strike DR-7 9600 US32D HES

With Request to Exit - Fail SecureN Electronic Strike DR-05, DR-06 9600-630-LBM (Match Exist.) US32D HES

With Request to Exit - Fail SecureX Controller & Power Supply: DR-07 Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply:DR-05, DR-06 Provided under Section 28 33 00X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: (Stop / Hold) one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP - HW

New Provided under Section 28 33 00X Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH

Existing to operate Dr-05, Dr-06, Dr-07N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28 X Door Release Switch one Existing to remainX Door Horn / Strobe one Existing to remainX Door Opener: one DR-05 Existing to remain




Anson #AE - 04: Single Interior Security Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Full Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Hollow Metal Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: AE-DR-8, AE-DR-11 LH / RHR: AE-DR-9, AE-DR-12

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 3 ea. Existing to remainX Pulls one ea. Existing to remainN Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. 2090 Crossbar US26D FAN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Closer: one ea. Existing to remainX Magnetic Hold Open: one ea. Existing to remainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH

DR-08/09, DR-11/12N Door Release Switch one ea. set Match ExistingX Door Opener: one DR-08 Existing to remain

Anson #AE - 05: Single Interior Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Full Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Hollow Metal Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: AE-DR-10 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 3 ea. Existing to remainX Lockset one ea. Existing to remainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP (Match Existing) Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Door Release Switch one ea. set Match Existing




Fisher Elementary School

Fisher #FI - 00: Existing Hardwired Access Control Head End EquipmentSalvage and Return to Owner

Headend Equipment Fire Rating: None Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Site Control Unit (SCU): one ea. MillenniumX Door Control Boards (DCB): two ea. MillenniumX Power Supply w/ Cabinet (PS): one ea. MillenniumX Site Ethernet Interface (SEI) one ea. Millennium

Fisher #FiE - 01: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: FI-DR-1 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainN Power Transfer Device one ea EPT - 10X Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Elect. Rim) one ea. 7220 -P – secure US26D YN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to Remain X Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to RemainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28X Door Opener: one Existing to remain

Fisher #FiE - 02: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: FI-DR-2 / 3 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainN Power Transfer Device one ea EPT - 10X Exit Devices (CVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Elect. CVR) one ea. 7220 -P – secure US26D YX Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to RemainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Fisher #FiE - 03: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors




30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: FI-DR-4, FI-DR6(40” wide) LH / RHR:

X Continuous Gear Hinge: Existing to Remain PEX Power Transfer: Existing to Remain VOX Exit Devices (electric Rim) Existing to Remain YX Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to Remain YX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to Remain SX Card Reader: one Existing to Remain SXF-1050X Door Release Switch one Existing to remainN Remote Request to Exit: one XMS-PIR-REX White Plas.SN

New provided under Section 28 33 00

Fisher #FiE - 04: Single Interior Office door 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: FI-DR-5 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to Remain X Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to Remain SXF-1050N Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Release Switch one Match Existing

Fisher #FiE - 05: Single Exterior Food Service door 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: FI-DR-7

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Mortis) one Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to Remain X Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to Remain SXF-1050N Remote Request to Exit: one XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Fisher #FiE - 06: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: FI-DR-8 /9, FI-DR-10 / 11 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Continuous Gear Hinge: Existing to Remain PEX Power Transfer: DR-9 & 11 Existing to Remain VOX Exit Devices (Rim) DR-8 & 10 Existing to Remain YX Exit Devices (electric Rim) DR-9 & 11 Existing to Remain YX Removable Mullion: one Existing to Remain YX Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to Remain SCHX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to Remain YX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to Remain SX Card Reader: one Existing to Remain SXF-1050N Remote Request to Exit: one XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Franklin Elementary School

Franklin #FrE - 01: Pairs Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: FR-DR-7/8, FR-DR-9/10, FR-DR-11/12, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Power Transfer Device one Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Exit Devices (Elect. Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to remainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainX Door Opener: DR-8, DR-10 Existing to remainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Franklin #FrE - 02: Pairs Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush hollow metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: FR-DR-1/2 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)

X Hinges: Existing to remainX Pulls one ea. Existing to remainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to remainX Removable Mullion one ea. Existing to remain N Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28


Pair: FR-DR-3/4 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 2 Existing to remain, Remove and replace middle hingesN Electric Hinges: one ea. T4A3386 – QC US26D MKX Exit Devices (CVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Elect. CVR) one ea. 7220 -P – secure US26D YN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28





Pair: FR-DR-5/6 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)

X Hinges: Existing to remainX Pulls one ea. Existing to remainX Exit Devices (SVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. 8913 US26D SARN Removable Mullion(key) one ea. KR-4023 STL SARN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00X Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Hoglan Elementary School

Hoglan #HE - 01: Pairs Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: HE-DR-4/5, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Power Transfer Device one Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Exit Devices (Elect. Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to remainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Hoglan #HE - 02: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 36 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: HE-DR-1, LH / RHR: HE-DR-6, HE-DR-7,

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to remainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to remainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Hoglan #HE - 3 Pairs Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush hollow metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: HE-DR-2/3, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 3 ea. 2 remain, Remove and replace middle hingeN Electric Hinges: one ea. T4A3386 – QC US26D MKX Exit Devices (SVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Elect. CVR) one ea. 7110 PB626F-P – secure US26D YX Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Hoglan #HE - 04: Interior Server room door




30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: HE-DR-8 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)

X Hinges: 3 ea. Existing to remainX Lockset one ea. Existing to remainX Closer: one ea. Existing to remainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH




Rogers Elementary School

Rogers #RE - 01: Pairs Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: RE-DR-3 LH / RHR: RE-DR-4 Pair: RE-DR-1/2,

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Removable Mullion(key) DR-1/2 Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US4 HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Rogers #RE - 02: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

LH / RHR: RE-DR-5, RE-DR-6, RE-DR-7, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike DR-5, DR-7 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-6 9600-630-LBM US4 HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28X Door Opener: DR-7 Existing to remain

Rogers #RE - 03: Single Interior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

LH / RHR: RE-DR-9, RE-DR-10, RE-DR-11, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike DR-9, DR-11 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-10 9600-630-LBM US4 HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHX Door Opener: DR-11 Existing to remain




Rogers #RE - 04: Single Interior office/vestibule door 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: RE-DR-8

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00

Rogers #RE - 05: Single Interior office door 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: RE-DR-12, RE-DR-13,

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Door Release Switch DR-12 New provided under Section 28 33 00

Rogers #RE - 06: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: RE-DR-14, RE-DR-15(44”w) LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US4 HES N Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH




Woodbury Elementary School

Woodbury #WE - 01: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: WE-DR-5, WE-DR-6

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Power Transfer Device one Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Elect. Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Controller & Power Supply: one Existing to RemainX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to remainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Woodbury #WE - 02: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: WE-DR-2 LH / RHR: WE-DR-1 Pair: WE-DR-8 / 9

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Pulls: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion WE-DR-8 / 9 Existing to remain N Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Woodbury #WE - 03: Single Exterior Loading Dock Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: WE-DR-3 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Hinges: (Elect.) Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Elect. Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00E Door Position Switch: one ea. Existing to Remain - MSS-1N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Woodbury #WE - 04: Single Exterior Exit Doors -Gym 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: WE-DR-4

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Pulls: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Woodbury #WE - 05: Interior Server Room Door 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: WE-DR-7 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH




Lenihan Intermediate School

Lenihan #LIS - 00: Existing Hardwired Access Control Head End EquipmentSalvage and Return to Owner

Headend EquipmentX Site Control Unit (SCU): MillenniumX Door Control Boards (DCB): MillenniumX Power Supply w/ Cabinet (PS): MillenniumX Site Ethernet Interface (SEI) Millennium

Lenihan #LIS-01a: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LIS-DR-1 LH / RHR: LIS-DR-20

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Lenihan #LIS -01b: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: LIS-DR-2/3, LIS-DR-6/7, LIS-DR-21/22 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Lenihan #LIS -01c: Single Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LIS-DR-5, LIS-DR-23 LH / RHR: LIS-DR-4, LIS-DR-8,

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28X Door Opener: DR-8 Existing to remain

Lenihan #LIS -02a: Single Interior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LIS-DR-9 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Lenihan #LIS -02b: Pair Interior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: LIS-DR-10/11, LIS-DR-14/15 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28




Lenihan #LIS -02c: Single Interior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LIS-DR-13 LH / RHR: LIS-DR-12, LIS-DR-16,

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28X Door Opener: DR-16 Existing to remain

Lenihan #LIS-03: Single Vestibule / Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: LIS-DR-17

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00

Lenihan #LIS-04: Single Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:


Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00




Lenihan #LIS-05: Single Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:


Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Lenihan #LIS -06: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: LIS-DR-24/25 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike DR-25 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-24 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Lenihan #LIS-07: Single Exterior Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LIS-DR-26 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (CVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. 2090 Crossbar US26D FAN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Lenihan #LIS-08: Single Exterior Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:


Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainController & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Lenihan #LIS-09: Pair Exterior Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: LIS-DR-28/29 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike DR-28 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-29 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainE Card Reader: one ea. set Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Miller Middle School

Miller #MMS-01: Pair Egress Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MMS-DR-1/2 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to Remain -remove middle hingesN Electric Hinges: one ea. T4A3386 – QC US26D MKX Exit Devices (SVR) one ea.- Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (elect. SVR) one ea. 7110-PB626FX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP - HWN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Miller #MMS-02: Single Food Service Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: MMS-DR-2

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lock set one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP - HWN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28

Miller #MMS -03: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MMS-DR-4/5, MMS-DR-6/7, MMS-DR-8/9, MMS-DR-10/11, Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Electronic Strike DR-4, DR-11 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-4 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Door Opener: DR-7, DR-8 Existing to remainN Card Reader: DR-4, DR-11 SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Miller #MMS-04: Single Interior Vestibule Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:


Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESX Door Opener: one ea. Existing to remain N Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Miller #MMS -05: Pair Interior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MMS-DR-13/14, MMS-DR-15/16 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Fixed Mullion DR13/14 Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike DR-16 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: DR-16 SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Miller #MMS-06: Single Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:


Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain N Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00




Miller #MMS-07: Single Vestibule / Office Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: MMS-DR-18 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Electronic Strike one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00

Miller #MMS-08: Single Interior Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: MMS-DR-19, MMS-DR-20

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain N Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

Miller #MMS - 09: Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: MMS-DR-21, LH / RHR: MMS-DR-22, Pair: MMS-DR-23/24

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Removable Mullion(key) DR-23/24 Existing to RemainX Pulls: one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Card Reader: one ea. set SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX Div 28




Marshalltown High School

High School #MHS -01: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors - Gym 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MHS-DR-1/2, MHS-DR-3/4, MHS-DR-5/6, MHS-DR-7/8 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Power Transfer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainX Card Reader: one Existing to RemainX Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. provided under Section 28 33 00N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX White Plas. SN Div 28X Opener: DR-1 Existing to Remain

High School #MHS -02: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MHS-DR-9/10, MHS-DR-11/12, MHS-DR-17/18, MHS-DR-19/20, MHS-DR-21/22, MHS-DR-23/24

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: DR-9,DR-20,DR-24 SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. provided under Section 28 33 00N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX White Plas. SN Div 28N Door Release Switch:DR-9,DR-20,DR-24 provided under Section 28 33 00N Intercom: DR-9,DR-20,DR-24 provided under Section 28 33 00X Opener: DR-20 Existing to Remain




High School #MHS -03: Pair Exterior Entrance / Exit Doors - Auditorium 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MHS-DR-13/14 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing to Remain X Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion one ea. Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 9600-630-LBM US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. provided under Section 28 33 00N Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX White Plas. SN Div 28

High School #MHS-04: Single Interior Server Room Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: MHS-DR-15, MHS-DR-16 LH / RHR:

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain N Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

High School #MHS -05: Pair Exterior Exit Doors – Delayed Egress 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Glass Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pairs: MHS-DR-25/26, MHS-DR-27/28, MHS-DR-29/30 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainN Power Transfer Device one ea. (EPT)X Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. - Existing to be Removed N Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. 7200 -D US26D YX Cylinder: one ea. Existing to RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. provided under Section 28 33 00




MLA / Support Services Center

#MLA-01: Exterior Doors – New Request to Exit 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: LH / RHR: MLA-DR-1, MLA-DR-8, MLA-DR-13, MLA-DR-16, Pair: MLA-DR-9/10, MLA-DR-11/12, MLA-DR-14/15

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X –ALL HARDWARE--: Existing to RemainN Remote Request to Exit: one ea. XMS-PIR-REX White Plas. SN Div 28

#MLA-02: Single Interior Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

RH / LHR: MLA-DR-5, MLA-DR-21 LH / RHR: MLA-DR-2

Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Lockset one ea. Existing to Remain X Electronic Strike DR-5, DR-21 Existing to RemainN Electronic Strike one ea. 1006 US32D HESX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

#MLA-03: Pair Interior Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: 20 Doors:

Pair: MLA-DR-3/4 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Electric Hinges: DR-3 Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (SVR) DR-4 Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (elect. SVR) DR-3 Existing to RemainX Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP - HWN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Card Reader: one SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCH




#MLA-04: Pair Exterior Loading Dock Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Hollow Metal Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: MLA-DR-6/7 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainN Power Transfer Device one (EPT)X Exit Devices (SVR) one ea. - Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (elect. SVR) one ea. 7110P – PB526F X Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00

#MLA-05: Pair Exterior Entrance Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Aluminum Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: MLA-DR-17/18 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: Existing to RemainX Power Transfer Device one ea Existing to RemainX Exit Devices (Rim) one ea. Existing To RemainX Removable Mullion(key) one ea. Existing to RemainX Closer: DR-18 Existing to RemainX Opener: DR-17 Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28

#MLA-06: Pair Interior Entrance Doors 30 x 70 x 1-3/4” Insulated Flush Wood Doors in Existing Frames. Fire Rating: None Doors:

Pair: MLA-DR-19/20 Each leaf to have: (X = Existing / N = New)X Hinges: 4 each - Existing to Remain, remove one ea.N Electric Hinges: one ea. T4A3386 – QC US26D MK X Exit Devices (SVR) one ea. Existing To be RemovedN Exit Devices (elect. SVR) one ea. 71210-PB626F X Closer: one ea. Existing to RemainN Card Reader: one ea. SXF-1050 Blk. Plas. SCHN Controller & Power Supply: one ea. Provided under Section 28 33 00N Door Position Switch: one ea. 968XTP Div 28N Door Release Switch one New provided under Section 28 33 00N Intercom one New provided under Section 28 33 00






DIVISION 9 - FINISHES


SECTION 09 91 13EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substratesB. Related Sections

1. Section 09 91 23 “Interior Painting”

1.3 REFERENCESA. ASTM D16 “Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products”.B. ASTM D2016 “Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood”.C. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) “Guide to U.S. Government Paint

Specifications”.D. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) “Painting - Architectural Specifications

Manual”.E. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) “Steel Structures Painting Manual”.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat

indicated.1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.3. Label each coat of each Sample.4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum twenty (20) years documented experience.B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum ten (10)

years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

DIVISION 9 - FINSIHES



1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to applicable NFPA code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material

and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: provide products by one of the following:

1. Sherwin Williams, Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, DupontB. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 00 43 25 / 01 60 00.

2.2 PAINT, GENERALA. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: To be selected Post bid by Architect from manufacturer’s standard samples.

2.3 EXTERIOR COATINGSA. Block Filler, Modified Epoxy Type (MEBF)

1. Sherwin Williams EpoPlex B70 Series2. Pittsburgh Amerlock 400BF Filler3. Diamond Vogel V-Cote 1004. DuPont 25P

B. Alkyd-Phenolic Primer (APP):1. Sherwin Williams Kem Kromik B50 Series2. Sherwin Williams Problock Alkyd B79W103. Pittsburgh Amercoat 185H Phenolic Primer4. Diamond Vogel V-Tech 6005. DuPont 681-FD

C. Acrylic Latex Paint (AL):1. Sherwin Williams DTM B66 & A-100 A82 Series2. Sherwin Williams DTM B66W1 Series 3. Sherwin Williams Promar 200 B20/B31 Series4. Sherwin Williams B70W200 Series 5. Pittsburgh Speedhide Exterior Latex Semi-Gloss 6-900XI6. Diamond Vogel DE Series

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 00 72 13. B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.




C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be

painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall

items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated.D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATIONA. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean Work under provisions of 01 77 00. B. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.C. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Test questionable coated areas in accordance with PDCA.




3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SHEDULEA. Shop Primed Metal - Semi-Gloss Finish

1. 1st Coat: APP (5-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

B. Masonry (CMU) - Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: MEBF (8 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2mils dry)


DIVISION 9 - FINISHES


SECTION 09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates:B. Related Sections

1. Section 09 91 13 “Exterior Painting”

1.3 REFERENCESA. ASTM D16 “Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products”.B. ASTM D2016 “Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood”.C. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) “Guide to U.S. Government Paint

Specifications”.D. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) “Painting - Architectural Specifications

Manual”.E. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) “Steel Structures Painting Manual”.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat

indicated.1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.3. Label each coat of each Sample.4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1.5 ALTERNATES:A. See Section 01 23 00 “Alternates” for Alternates relating to the Work of this Section.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with

minimum twenty (20) years documented experience.B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum ten (10) years

documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS




A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material

and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:B. Manufacturers - Paint

1. Diamond Vogel, Sherwin Williams, Pittsburgh.C. Manufacturers - Transparent Finishes

1. Benjamin Moore, Diamond Vogel, Pittsburgh, Sherwin Williams.D. Manufacturers - Stain

1. Benjamin Moore, Diamond Vogel, Pittsburgh, Gemini, Sherwin Williams.E. Manufacturers - Primer Sealers

1. United States Gypsum, Diamond Vogel, Sherwin Williams, Dupont, Pittsburgh, Old Masters.F. Manufacturers - Block Filler

1. Diamond Vogel, Sherwin Williams, Pittsburgh, Dupont.G. Manufacturers - Field Catalyzed Coatings

1. Diamond Vogel, Sherwin Williams, Pittsburgh.H. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 00 43 25 / 01 60 00.

2.2 PAINT, GENERALA. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:a. Acrolein, Acrylonitrile, Antimony, Benzene, Butyl benzyl phthalate, Cadmium, Di

(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, Di-n-butyl phthalate, Di-n-octyl phthalate, Diethyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, Diethyl phthalate, Dimethyl phthalate, Ethylbenzene, Formaldehyde, Hexavalent chromium, Isophorone, Lead, Mercury, Methyl ethyl ketone, Methyl isobutyl ketone, Methylene chloride, Naphthalene, Toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, Vinyl chloride.




2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically

indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.B. Patching Materials: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

2.4 FINISHESA. To be selected Post bid by Architect from manufacturer’s standard samples.

2.5 INTERIOR COATINGSA. Block Filler (BF):

1. Sherwin Williams Preprite B25W252. Pittsburgh Prema-Coat 4-1003. Diamond Vogel BF1507

B. Block Filler, Modified Epoxy Type (MEBF)1. Sherwin Williams EpoPlex B70 Series2. Pittsburgh Amerlock 400 BF Epoxy Filler3. Diamond Vogel V-Cote 100

C. Alkyd-Phenolic Primer (APP):1. Sherwin Williams Kem Kromik B50 Series2. Sherwin Williams Problock Alkyd B79W103. Pittsburgh Amercoat 185H Phenolic Alkyd Primer4. Diamond Vogel V-Tech 600

D. Vinyl-Acrylic Primer (VAP):1. Sherwin Williams Preprite – B28W2002. Pittsburgh Speedhide 6-23. Diamond Vogel DU-1507 PVA

E. Water-Base Acrylic-Epoxy (AE):1. Sherwin Williams Preprite 200 B28W2002. Sherwin Williams B70 / B70W200 Series3. Pittsburgh 16-551 Series4. Diamond Vogel MC Series

F. Acrylic Polyurethate (APF):1. Sherwin Williams Acrolon 218 B65W600 Series2. Pittsburgh 95-812& 95-8800 Series3. Diamond Vogel Pinnacle 330HS4. Diamond Vogel AZ Series Cote-All

G. Acrylic Latex Paint (AL):1. Sherwin Williams DTM B66 & A-100 A82 Series2. Sherwin Williams Promar 200 B20/B31 Series3. Sherwin Williams B70W200 Series 4. Pittsburgh 6-411 Series5. Diamond Vogel DE Series

H. Alkyd Undercoat (AUC):1. Sherwin Williams Preprite B79W102. Pittsburgh Seal Grip Universal Acrylic Primer. 17-9213. Diamond Vogel CU-1401

I. Penetrating Wood Stain (PWS):1. Sherwin Williams S64 Series2. Pittsburgh Olympic 44500 Oil Stain3. Old Masters Penetrating Stain

J. Paste Wood Filler (PWF):1. Old Masters2. James Day Co.




K. Polyurethane Clear Coat (PCC):1. Sherwin Williams WoodClassics A67F12. Pittsburgh Olympic WB Polyurethane Clear.427854 Gloss. 42786 SG.3. Old Masters

L. Solvent Born Acrylic (SBA):1. Canyon Tone Stain2. Perma-Crete Vertical Concrete Stain.4-5110

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 00 72 13. B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless

moisture content of surfaces are below the maximums allowed by manufacturer.D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be

painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall

items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated.D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth.




3.3 APPLICATIONA. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated piping, pipe hangers, and supports.b. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.c. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.e. Mechanical equipment that is factory-primed finish for field painting.

2. Electrical Work: Electrical equipment that is factory-primed finish for field painting.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean Work under provisions of 01 77 00. B. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.C. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.




3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Test questionable coated areas in accordance with PDCA.

3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULEA. Shop Primed Metal – Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish

1. 1st Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

B. Shop Primed Metal – Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

C. Shop Primed Metal Doors & Frames- Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: APP (5-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry)

a. Omit where shop prime suitable to receive APF without barrier coat.2. 2nd Coat: APF (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

D. Galvanized Metal – Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

E. Galvanized Metal – Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

F. Concrete, Gypsum Board – Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: VAP (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

G. Gypsum Board – Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

H. Concrete – Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

I. Masonry (CMU) - Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: BF (8 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2mils dry)

J. Masonry (CMU) – Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: MEBF (8 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AE (5 mils wet, 2mils dry)

K. Wood, Hardboard, Fiberboard - Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: AUC (5-10 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry)2. 2nd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)3. 3rd Coat: AL (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry)

L. Wood - Semi-Gloss Finish1. 1st Coat: PWS2. 2nd Coat: PWF3. 3rd Coat: PCC


DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

TSP, Inc. © 26 05 00 – 1/6 06190256.00 JRB 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR BID 09/04/2019

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Basic Contract definitions are as follows:

1. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, ready for the intended use and in complete operating condition."

2. Furnish: The term "furnish" means "to purchase devices and/or equipment and hand over to another entity for installation"

3. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations."

4. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," and similar phrases.

5. Approve: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Engineer's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications and requests, is limited to the Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contracts.

6. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended.

7. Contractor: The term "Contractor" shall carry the same meaning as "Electrical Contractor" or “Division 26 Contractor”.

8. Or Equal: The term "Or equal" shall carry the same meaning as "approved as equal by the Engineer"

9. Owner: All references here-in and on drawings to “Owner” shall be the same as

“Marshalltown Community School District”. B. Product specific to this section definitions:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION A. All drawings, specifications and documents for this project shall be taken as a whole. Prior to

installation, the Contractor shall be familiar with this project by carefully reviewing and comparing all documents that pertain to this project.

B. In preparation of the contract documents, a reasonable effort has been made to provide layouts and connections based on selected and specified manufacturer's equipment. Since physical space, electrical connections, equipment arrangements and other requirements may vary


SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL


according to each manufacturer, the final responsibility for connections, initial access and proper fit is the responsibility of this Contractor.

C. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations, and maintain working clearances per the NEC or additional as required by these documents.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. D. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and

arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations.

E. Coordinate installation locations of all equipment with other trades to verify proper fit and function. The General Contractor shall facilitate a pre-construction planning meeting for all major sub-contractors (Divisions 26 thru 28) to coordinate actual equipment with installation locations. General Contractor shall provide meeting minutes.

F. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Provide access doors and panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

G. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

H. Prior to roughing in for electrical equipment furnished by others, verify the voltage and current characteristics and control connections of this equipment. Notify the Engineer where equipment connection requirements do not match the provisions indicated on the documents.

I. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

J. Electrical contractor shall pay all fees for permits, licensing, and inspections applicable to the work of Division 26. Secure regular inspections as required by State and local regulations. Pay charges by regulating agencies for Drawings, Specifications, review of Drawings and Specifications, and the inspections of installations. Contractor shall pay all charges and fees levied by the serving utility and include these charges in the bid.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings and Measurements

1. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing-in measurements or to serve as shop drawings.

2. Devices and special equipment are shown on the drawings only in a schematic manner and not necessarily in their specific location. The Contractor shall be responsible for exact locations of the devices and final routing of raceway to devices to form a functional and aesthetic installation either by careful review of all architectural elevations, tile patterns, surface finishes, and equipment arrangements or by consultation with the Engineers and/or other trades involved.

B. Ordinances and Codes 1. All work shall be executed in accordance with the current edition of the City Electrical

Ordinances, State Electrical Laws and Statutes and National Electrical Code (NEC) and be subject to the inspection of these departments. All fees, permits, licenses, etc., necessary in order to complete the work of this section shall be paid by this Contractor.

C. Workmanship 1. The installation work included in this specification shall be performed in a neat

workmanlike manner by persons experienced and skilled in the Electrical trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. All exposed parts of the electrical wiring




systems such as exposed conduits, flush plates, cabinet trim, fixtures, etc., shall be square and true with the building construction.

D. Guarantee 1. This Contractor shall assume responsibility for any defects which may develop in any part

of his work caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment, and agrees to replace, repair, or alter, at his expense, any such faulty workmanship, material or equipment that has been brought to his attention during a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Acceptance of the work shall not waive this guarantee.

E. Materials and Equipment 1. All materials and equipment shall be new and of best quality, of the type best suited for

the purpose intended. All items shall be furnished by the Manufacturer’s Authorized Supplier. All electrical materials used in this work shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., where testing is provided and shall bear their label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches

(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.




2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or

less 3. Low-Emitting Materials: Liquid floor treatments shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of California Department of Public Health’s “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1-2010.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items. B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange

and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

D. Securely fasten and support electrical components and devices. E. Corridor devices shall be mounted in a straight line. F. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s instructions. G. See all Drawings and contract documents for additional installation requirements. H. All wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise noted and of a type allowed by the

contract documents. All conduits shall be concealed unless otherwise noted. I. Contractor shall identify extensions to existing circuiting for new door controller power supplies

on as-built drawings. J. Conduit routing is not shown on the Drawings. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide

required wire count and conduit sizing for complete and operating systems. Coordinate conduit routing on site with existing conditions. Base final installation of raceways on actual dimensions and conditions at project site.

K. All devices/equipment in fire rated ceiling spaces and walls shall be installed in such a manner as to retain fire rating as required. All penetrations of fire rated floors or walls shall be protected by materials and installation details that conform to Underwriter Laboratories Listings for through penetration fire stop systems.

L. See all Drawings and contract documents for approximate equipment locations and confirm locations on site. Coordinate equipment connections with Division 26 and review shop drawings and verify connection requirements (voltage, amperage, phase, location, etc). See door hardware and access control schedules for additional electrical connection requirements.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.




D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel [cast-iron] pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 DEMOLITION A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or

disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. Remove all unused cabling not labeled for future use.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

E. Contractor shall visit existing buildings before submitting bid and become familiar with existing conditions.

F. In general, wiring in existing buildings shall remain as is except as noted on drawings or specified elsewhere. When existing walls, ceilings, floors, electrical panels, light fixtures, switches or other outlets are removed, Contractor shall extend existing circuiting, if required, install junction boxes in walls, ceilings or floors, if required, to continue circuiting; remove all unused wire; remove all unused conduit where accessible; and install new plates with blank gangs as required on existing outlet boxes.




G. Added loads to existing circuiting shall be balanced between phases. On existing panelboards where circuitry is changed, this Contractor shall furnish a revised, typed panel directory.

H. Contractor shall assume in his bid that all existing equipment and fixtures noted to be reused are in good working condition and can be installed without any repairs. If certain items are found to be in need of repair or in unusable condition, Contractor shall notify the A/E for decision; however, Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by him to equipment in removal or handling.

I. Existing equipment removed and not re-used, at owner’s option, shall be returned to owner. If owner does not wish to keep the items, they shall become the Contractor's property and be removed from the site, unless otherwise specified or shown.

J. The Owner will be occupying the existing building during construction. Contractor shall provide any temporary connections necessary to maintain services to the existing service. Provide advance notice of minimum 72 hours to the Owner of any temporary service outages, and have this downtime approved before proceeding with work. Advance notice shall be in writing with copies to the A/E.

K. Demolition shown on plans is based on information shown on Owner’s existing plans and an on-site review of the facility. Quantities, types, and locations of items shown are believed to be accurate. However, this contractor shall be responsible for removing and/or relocating electrical equipment as required to accommodate remodeling.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to

permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Any cutting or drilling shall not affect structural integrity. Contractor shall contact A/E prior to drilling through any structural beam. No such cutting or drilling process shall endanger the structure integrity of the building.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.7 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in

Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to

suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and

application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,

and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 26 05 00



SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and

data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. Low-Voltage (Power): 90 to 2000 volts. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they

are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Encore Wire Corporation.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN-2 and XHHW-2. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC and Type SO

with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.


SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid or stranded for No. 12 AWG; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. Use a minimum No. 12 AWG. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, in raceway where concealed in building finishes.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical Systems." G. Conduit fill: A maximum of three phase conductors, each of a different phase, neutral(s), and a

grounding conductor shall be installed per conduit home run. H. All multi-wire branch circuits shall use dedicated neutrals for each phase circuit. Do not use

combined neutral conductors. I. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for

temperatures encountered. J. Derate conductors where conduits are exposed to sunlight on rooftops per NEC 310.15(B)(3)c. K. Stranded conductors shall be terminated in a proper way so all strands are effectively

conductive together.

3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack from face of box.

D. All connections shall guarantee a good electrical and mechanical connection with conductor to conductor contact. No intermediary current path (material between conductors) is allowed. Connections shall be made using twist-on type connectors such as IDEAL INDUSTRIES

connector brands WIRE-NUT, WING NUT, OR TWISTER. Quick connect “stab-in” connectors will not be allowed.




E. Splices or taps in handholes, manholes, or other in-ground enclosures for conductors size No. 6 AWG and smaller: 1. "King Safety Sealed" connectors, taped and then coated with a waterproofing product

equal to 3M "ScotchKote Electrical Coating". F. Splices or taps in handholes, manholes, or other in-ground enclosures for conductors larger

than size No. 6 AWG: 1. "King Safety Sealed" connectors, taped and then coated with a waterproofing product

equal to 3M Scotchcast "Resin Splice Kits".

3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including building wire, connections,

and connectors. B. Voltage Drop Calculation:

1. Indicate on as-builts drawings, the conductors being up-sized due to voltage drop. Indicate length of conductors, calculated load (amperage or wattage), and conductor size.








SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding and bonding systems and

equipment.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 12 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 10 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all and branch circuits.

DIVISION 26 - DIVISION NAME

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


B. Communication Circuits Operating at Less than 50 Volts: Circuits operating at less than 50 volts shall be grounded in accordance with NEC articles 720 and 725.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Where grounding or bonding conductors are routed in ferrous metallic conduit, the grounding conductor must be bonded at both ends of conduit.

C. Bond bushings where reducing washers or concentric knockouts are used. END OF SECTION 26 05 26



SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.




4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. Supports shall be Listed for the installation.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Low Voltage Cable Supports: 1. Cables shall be supported by conduit, cable tray (ladder racks), or approved cable hooks. 2. Cable hooks shall be installed no farther than 5’ apart. 3. J-hooks: Steel, UL listed, ultimate static load limit 50 lbs. minimum. Wide base, beveled

edges. Provide corners, drop-outs, and direction changes with coating (Xylan) for smooth, frictionless surface. Rated to support Category 6 and higher cables, and optical fiber cables. Size and quantity shall be as required.

4. If required, assemble to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam clips, flange clips, drop wire/rod, C and Z purlin clips.

5. Provide CADDY CableCat J-hooks as manufactured by ERICO, Inc, Cooper’s B-Line CAT32 Series, the Hook as manufactured by MonoSystems, or approved equivalent.

6. Supply velcro straps, length and strength as required to properly organize and bundle cables. Straps shall NOT be used for supporting cables.

G. Conduit and Cabling: All conduit and cabling shall be supported with UL Listed and Approved supports.

H. Wire ties are not an acceptable form of raceway supports. I. Metal decking shall not be used to support electrical devices, light fixtures, boxes or raceway. J. Raceways must be a minimum of 1 1/2" from nearest surface of roof decking per NEC 300.4(E). K. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.




4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel

shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt

conduit clamps, or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

D. Air-craft cable (or Gripple) with attachments to structure (not decking) and cable clips to secure raceways are allowed provided the installation meets the requirements of these specifications including, but not limited to, the minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lbs. Horizontal supports are required to be used with a minimum of supports going opposite directions every other support. Aircraft cable (or Gripple) is not allowed to support box/junction boxes.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1. EMT may be

supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated: 1. Backboards: Mount cabinets, lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards,

disconnect switches, and control enclosures on plywood, fire-retardant treated, painted (gray), 3/4 inch. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry.”

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.




2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. G. RMC: Rigid metal (steel) conduit.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. RMC Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. EMT: ANSI C80.3. F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.




2. Fittings for EMT: Zinc coated steel with set-screw or compression fittings with insulated throat type.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: For exposed raceways in finished areas where indicated or where

required in existing areas where concealed conduit is not possible. Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Prime coating, ready for field painting (paint to match wall). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.4 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Garvin Industries. 5. Hoffman. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 8. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 9. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 10. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 11. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 14. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.




F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Masonry Box Support: Provide supports to secure box in concrete block walls equivalent to Hubbell Block-Loc #990.

H. Low Voltage Junction Boxes: 1. For 1 1/4" conduit stub up provide box similar to Hubbell RACO #259. 2. For 1 1/2" conduit stub up provide box similar to Garvin Industries #72181-1-1/2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit (RMC). 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4. 5. Boxes: Cast aluminum. Malleable iron is prohibited.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit (RMC).Concealed

in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Risers: All through floor conduit risers shall be RMC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Maximum of 6’ in length unless otherwise approved.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit (RMC). 7. Raceways for Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 8. Raceways for Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Communications Cable: EMT. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size for branch circuit homeruns and all

exterior work unless otherwise noted; 1/2-inch (16-mm) for other interior work unless otherwise noted.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless

otherwise indicated. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum

raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. G. Communication cabling shall have long sweep elbows. H. All conduits 2” and larger shall have grounding bushings on ends.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange stub-ups so

curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.




D. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

E. Sleeves: See Specifications 260500 for sleeve requirements through concrete slabs and walls. F. Mounting Heights: Install equipment and devices at heights indicated on Electrical Symbols &

Abbreviations sheet, unless noted otherwise. G. Backboxes shall not be installed back-to-back. Provide 6-inch separation minimum unless

otherwise noted. H. Do not install backboxes in fully grouted cells of masonry walls. I. Outlet boxes shall not be set back more than 1/4" from finished wall. Devices shall be rigidly

supported to the box (not the wall) at the surface of the wall. J. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements. K. Conduit and Cabling: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building

systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. L. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. M. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. N. Conceal raceways in gymnasium, clerestories, and similar with exposed structure (no false

ceiling) in walls until above the bottom of the structure supports when able. O. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

Q. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter

squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

S. Raceways for Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50

feet (15 m). 2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet

(23 m). 3. Install with a maximum of three 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of

raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.




2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Expansion Joints:

1. Conduits 3 inches and larger, rigidly secured to building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, shall be provided with expansion and deflection couplings. The couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Conduits smaller than 3 inches shall be provided with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint, and connected by 15 inches of slack flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above may be installed.

3. An expansion fitting is required to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction for RNC where the length of the raceway change is expected to be 1/4 in. or greater in a straight run between securely mounted items such as boxes, cabinets, elbows, or other conduit terminations per NEC 352.44.

V. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. Flex shall be supported per NEC. Flex to light fixtures shall not rest on ceiling grid. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

W. Masonry Box Support: Provide supports to secure box even with top of concrete blocks.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33







SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Instruction signs. 4. Equipment identification labels. 5. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, Owner, Owner’s room numbers (not plan room numbers) manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. D. Permanent Black Marker: Provide neatly handwritten label on each junction box and on the

inside of each device cover plate indicating associated panel and circuit number.

2.2 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up

to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.




3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white

letters on a dark-gray background for all “normal” systems. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting

Sections. B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION A. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Identify all conductors in same junction or pull box, use

color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to phase. B. Permanent Black Marker: Provide neatly handwritten label on each junction box indicating

associated panel and circuit number. C. Where the premises wiring system has branch circuits supplied from more than one nominal

voltage system, each ungrounded conductor of a branch circuit, where accessible, shall be identified by system per NEC 210.5(C). The means of identification shall be permanently posted on each branch-circuit distribution panelboard/equipment. 1.

D. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to door controller and power supply enclosures. Systems include power,control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. b. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets,

and racks. c. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for

signal and control functions.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to

the location and substrate.




F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections.






DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS


SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Pathways. 2. UTP cabling. 3. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. 4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 6. Cabling system identification products.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding associated with

communications cabling. 2. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" j-hook cable supports. 3. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or

solid-bottom channel. D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from

building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection

or cross-connection. F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by

individual transverse members (rungs). I. LAN: Local area network. J. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several

telecommunications outlet/connectors. K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates. L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. M. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side

rails and a bottom without ventilation openings. N. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and

a bottom having openings for the passage of air. O. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals

between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors

be installed for each work area.




2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the components that extend

from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable

length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) in the horizontal cross-connect.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For each cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and

physical relationship between the installed components. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include data for each type of product and containing the following: 1. Descriptions of network cabling equipment and normal operating procedures. 2. Riser Diagrams showing complete installed UTP and cabling. 3. Proof of Performance Report outlining the operating parameters tested, complete test

results, and a summary of industry standards used for each parameter.

1.7 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. Guarantee system, in writing, against defects in workmanship and associated material and labor

not covered by cabling system warranty, for one year after final acceptance. During this time, the entire system shall be kept in proper operating condition at no additional labor or material cost to the Owner.

B. Manufacturer of Structure Cabling System (SCS) shall provide directly to the owner a (15) year Application Assurance Warranty and a (15) year Extended Product Warranty, including no charge for labor to replace any SCS product to be found defective within the (15) year warranty period. The certification of the system guarantees that the wiring system will support all current and future industry standard voice and data applications.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall provide evidence of successful completion of other operational systems of

similar scope and complexity. Contractor shall submit the following with shop drawings to be an approved installer (if the Contractor does not meet the requirements they are responsible for subcontracting for an approved installer): 1. Contractor shall provide training documentation of assigned staff corresponding to the

type of cabling and equipment specified.




2. Contractor shall meet manufacturer's requirements for the provision and installation of specified equipment.

3. Contractor shall provide proof of certification as structured cabling system installer for system provided under this bid.

4. Installer Qualifications: Contractor must be a certified installer by the State. B. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by a BICSI registered telecommunications installers and manufacturer’s certified installed.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as a registered telecommunications installers and also a manufacturer’s certified installed to supervise on-site testing.

4. This contractor must have a Designer on staff who will be ultimately responsible for this project. The Designer must have sufficient experience in this type project as to be able to lend adequate technical support to the field forces during installation, during the warranty period, and during any extended warranty periods or maintenance contracts. A resume of the responsible Designer must be provided for evaluation by the Engineer. Should the Designer assigned to this project change during the installation, the new Designer assigned must also submit a resume for review by the Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Designer does not possess adequate qualifications to support the project, the Engineer reserves the right to require this contractor to assign an Designer who, in the Engineer’s opinion, possesses the necessary skills and experience required of this project. This contractor must also have BICSI registered Installers and Technicians on staff and assign them to this project. The project shall be staffed at all times by Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead craftspersons, will be able to provide leadership and technical resources for the remaining craftspersons on the project. A minimum of 30 percent of personnel shall be BICSI registered telecommunications installers. Of that number 15 percent shall be registered at the Technician level, at least 40 percent shall be registered at the Installer level, and the balance shall be registered at the Apprentice level.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as a registered

telecommunications installers to supervise on-site testing. D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. G. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.




1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at

each work area.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 3. Device Plates: Five of each type. 4. Category Outlets: 10 of each. 5. Category 6 Cable: 300’. 6. Patch Cords: 15 percent spare of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent

degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. See Low Voltage Cable Supports in the Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

specification. C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for

Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1. Outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16 inch square box, 2 1/8 inches deep with single gang ring

with 1 1/4 inch conduit stub up to an accessible ceiling. Provide bushings on conduit ends.

2. Provide sleeves (fire-rated where installed in a rated wall) through all walls for horizontal cabling.

2.2 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. CommScope, Inc. 2. General Cable.

B. Description: Category 6 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, binder groups covered with a green thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. CommScope, Inc. 2. Panduit Corp.




B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2.

D. Patch Panels for Cat 6: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated and conductor

group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Category 6 modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

F. Terminations to Video Surveillance Cameras, Access Control Door Controllers,and Similar: Provide one of the following as approved by Manufacturer’s testing and warranty requirements: 1. Provide a surface box with jack above (or near) devices (in an accessible location above

the ceiling) and provide a patch cord as needed (plenum patch cords may be required). G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in lengths as needed; terminated with eight-

position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure

Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. 3. Provide quantity equivalent to amount to horizontal cables with one patch cord on each

end (at rack and at workstation). Length of cord as needed.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply

with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 1. Color: Data outlets shall be green.

2.5 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-B and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating

adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways, cable hooks, and cable trays except within consoles,

cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in Telecommunication Rooms. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3. Comply with requirements for supports specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and

Supports for Electrical Systems."




B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Wiring through Walls: Provide sleeves (fire-rated, similar to STI where installed in a rated wall) through all walls for horizontal cabling.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"

for installation of conduits and wireways. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. D. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 3. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor. 4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Provide patch panels and activations for all data cables. Provide rack mounted patch panels. B. Provide cross-connects as required for activations. C. Comply with NECA 1. D. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to

telecommunications outlet/connectors: a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or

for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet (15 m) from communications

equipment room. 6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 60

inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.




12. At the workstation, install a 10-foot long service loop above the accessible ceiling on each end of cable

13. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable.

14. At video surveillance cameras, install a 15-foot long service loop above the accessible ceiling.

15. At the door access control locations, install a 15-foot long service loop above the accessible ceiling.

16. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

17. Raceways shall be limited to 40% fill with 3 or more conductors. Fill shall be limited to 30% for raceways with less than 3 conductors.

18. Cabling shall not be painted. If cabling jacket is painted, it shall be replaced in its entirety. Raceways can be painted.

E. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry. F. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. H. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300

mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64

mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150


4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76


5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).




3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing

at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-B. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For

fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-B for Class 2

level of administration. D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is

accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at

device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify

each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label

each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-B. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.




3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified person approved by Manufacturer to perform tests and

inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew.

5. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed.

Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.

b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in

cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.






DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC LIFE SAFETY AND SECURITY

TSP, Inc. © 28 33 00 - 1/24 06190256.00 JRB 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR BID 09/04/2019

SECTION 28 33 00

SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes a general description, functional requirements, operational characteristics,

and criteria for an extension of the existing Avigilon Security Management System (SMS) of Marshalltown Community School Districts to incorporate new access control and video surveillance devices to multiple buildings of the District.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The existing Avigilon SMS is an enterprise class IP-enabled security software solution. The

SMS will supports the seamless integration of the Access Control System (ACS) and IP Video Management System (VMS) under a single platform. All access control, door locking hardware, and video surveillance cameras devices shall be compatible with the existing Avigilon ACS and VMS. Contractor shall modify existing Avigilon SMS as needed to incorporate new devices and equipment identified on the Drawings and in Specifications to create a complete and working system. Existing Millenium door controllers and power supplies shall be replaced with new door controllers and power supplies. Contractor shall verify on site the total quantity of existing door controllers and power supplies that are to be replaced for integration of the existing Millenium access control devices with the Avigilon ACS. Existing PDA devices shall be replaced with new as indicated on Drawings. Existing access control devices not receiving direct modifications shall remain functioning upon completion of work. Contractor to verify quantity of Avigilon door controllers, power supplies, and associated enclosures required to accommodate integration of new doors prior to bid.

B. All active network electronics to facilitate the expansion of the Avigilon SMS shall be provided by the Owner. Coordinate all network port connection requirements with the Owners’ IT staff. Coordinate any needed IP addresses with the Owners’ IT staff. Video coverage is to be deployed in designated areas indicated on the plans with final verification and aiming coordinated with the Owners’ selected staff.

C. Provide Server and client software licenses as required. D. All doors that receive new or modifications to existing access control devices and door

hardware shall be capable of being controlled remotely via District’s Wide Area Network (WAN). Coordinate with Owner for programming of all new or modified doors for changes to lock/unlock schedule.

E. This Contractor to coordinate final mounting of all access control and video surveillance equipment on site prior to installation. Contractor to also coordinate with door hardware supplier for connection to door hardware components. Door controllers shall have electrical characteristics that match the signal and power requirements of door hardware. Integrate door hardware specified in Division 08 Sections to function with the controls, software, and hardware in this Section.

F. This Contractor shall provide all boxes, raceways as needed for access control cabling. Contractor shall also furnish, install, and terminate all cabling required for this work.

G. This Contractor is responsible for all power requirements needed to serve new power supplies or other associated equipment. Extend nearest 120V electrical circuit with capacity to serve new loads.

H. This Contractor is responsible for connecting doors to fire alarm system, where indicated. Doors shall release from existing magnetic hold open devices upon fire alarm activation. Provide all relays, etc. as needed. Coordinate with fire alarm system supplier for all requirements.


SECTION 28 33 00



I. Testing and responsibility of operation all devices in system is by this Contractor. This Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and working system.

J. Supervision: System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device

1.4 DEFINITIONS A. ABA Track: Magnetic stripe that is encoded on track 2, at 75-bpi density in binary-coded

decimal format; for example, 5-bit, 16-character set. B. CCTV: Closed-circuit television. C. Controller: An intelligent peripheral control unit that uses a computer for controlling its

operation. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies. D. CPU: Central processing unit. E. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity. F. dpi: Dots per inch. G. DTS: Digital Termination Service: A microwave-based, line-of-sight communications provided

directly to the end user. H. File Server: A PC in a network that stores the programs and data files shared by users. I. GFI: Ground fault interrupter. J. Identifier: A credential card, keypad personal identification number or code, biometric

characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

K. I/O: Input/Output. L. LAN: Local area network. M. LED: Light-emitting diode. N. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-Controller communications link, with

additional Controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-Controller link with RS-485 communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

O. PC: Personal computer. This acronym applies to the Central Station, workstations, and file servers.

P. PCI Bus: Peripheral component interconnect; a peripheral bus providing a high-speed data path between the CPU and peripheral devices (such as monitor, disk drive, or network).

Q. PDF: (Portable Document Format.) The file format used by the Acrobat document exchange system software from Adobe.

R. Protected or Protection Zone: A space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely identified, the sensor or group of sensors assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication link to central-station control unit.

S. RF: Radio frequency. T. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power. U. RS-232: An TIA/EIA standard for asynchronous serial data communications between terminal

devices. This standard defines a 25-pin connector and certain signal characteristics for interfacing computer equipment.

V. RS-485: An TIA/EIA standard for multipoint communications. W. Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 100 lb or less and whose height is 60 inches or less;

dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes X. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or

jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone. Y. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. Z. TWAIN: (Technology without an Interesting Name.) A programming interface that lets a

graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.

AA. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.


SECTION 28 33 00



BB. WAN: Wide area network. CC. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows. DD. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the

credential card. EE. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation. FF. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific limited security system functions. GG. WYSIWYG: (What You See Is What You Get.) Text and graphics appear on the screen the

same as they will print.

1.5 REFERENCES A. The Codes and Regulations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent

referenced. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable international, federal, state, and local codes or standards current at the commencement of installation. The following list summarizes applicable standards: 1. UL 294, UL 1076, ULC 2. CE 3. FCC – Part 15, Part 68 4. NFPA 70, NEC 5. IEEE, RS 170 variable standard 6. IEEE, NTSC (color camera broadcast) 7. ISO Software Coding Standards for C++ and C## 8. RoHS

B. Published specification standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work in this section where cited below: 1. Open Network Video Interface (ONVIF) 2. Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 4. National Electrical Code / NFPA 70 (NEC) 5. American National Safety Institute (ANSI) 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 7. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 8. Business and Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) 9. Electronics Industry Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) 10. American Society of Industrial Security (ASIS)

C. Unless otherwise specified, specific references to code, regulations, standards, manufacturer instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies, when used to specify requirements for materials or design elements, shall mean the latest edition of each in effect at the date of submission of bids, or the date of Change Order or Field Order, as applicable.

1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings which include the following:

1. Include full schematic wiring information on these drawings for all devices. Wiring information shall include cable type, conductor routings, quantities, and connection details at device

2. Include a complete SMS one-line, block diagram. 3. Include a statement of the system sequence of operation. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring, and grounding.

B. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that all access control devices and video surveillance cameras are compatible with the Avigilon SMS.

C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


SECTION 28 33 00



D. Product Data: Provide complete product data that includes the following: 1. Manufacturer’s technical data for all material and equipment at the system and sub system

level to be provided as part of the SMS. 2.

E. Contract Close-Out Submittals: Provide the number of sets of hard copy manuals and the number of sets of electronic format manuals including operating instructions, maintenance recommendations and parts list including wiring and connection diagrams modified to reflect as-built conditions as indicated in Division 1. 1. Manuals: Each manual’s contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall include

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the contractor responsible for the installation and maintenance of the system and the factory representatives for each item of equipment for each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and labeled sections. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance testing. The manuals shall consist of the following:

a. Functional Design Manual: The functional design manual shall identify the operational requirements for the system and explain the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific functions. A description of hardware and software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be included.

b. Hardware Manual: The manual shall describe all equipment furnished including: 1) General description and specifications 2) Installation and check out procedures 3) Equipment layout and electrical schematics to the component level 4) System layout drawings and schematics 5) Alignment and calibration procedures 6) Manufacturers repair parts list indicating sources of supply

c. Software Manual: The software manual shall describe the functions of all software and shall include all other information necessary to enable proper loading, testing, and operation. The manual shall include: 1) Definition of terms and functions 2) System use and application software 3) Initialization, start up, and shut down 4) Reports generation 5) Details on forms customization and field parameters

d. Operators Manual: The operators manual shall fully explain all procedures and instructions for the operation of the system including: 1) Computers and peripherals 2) System start up and shut down procedures 3) Use of system, command, and applications software 4) Recovery and restart procedures 5) Graphic alarm presentation 6) Use of report generator and generation of reports 7) Data entry 8) Operator commands 9) Alarm messages and reprinting formats 10) System permissions functions and requirements

e. Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of maintenance for all equipment including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components. 1) Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be

stored at the site for ready access. f. As-Built Drawings: During system installation, the Contractor shall maintain a

separate hard copy set of drawings, elementary diagrams, and wiring diagrams of the SMS to be used for record drawings. This set shall be accurately kept up to


SECTION 28 33 00



date by the Contractor with all changes and additions to the SMS. Copies of the final as-built drawings shall be provided to the end user in DXF format.

F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access control system

shall comply with SIA TVAC. D. Installer: The Installer shall be a company approved by the Manufacturer of the equipment to be

provided and installed and shall have a minimum to five years documented experience in the installation of similar systems and shall have completed at least three systems of similar size, scope and complexity in the last five years. 1. Technical Support, Service and Maintenance: Installer shall be located within 3 hours

driving time from the Project Site and shall be able to respond to a service call with in twenty four (24) hours.

2. Installer shall: a. Install base of clients (particularly in K-12 and Higher Education) b. Factory training of service technicians c. UL Listing of facilities/products (with UL Certificate) d. Comprehensive Solution Maintenance Offerings

1.8 WARRANTY A. SMS Software and Field Hardware Warranty

1. SMS Software shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment from the manufacturer to be free of defects and will function in substantial accordance to the published specification.

2. SMS Field Hardware shall be warranted for a period of two (2) years from the date of shipment from the manufacturer, will be free from defects and will function in general accordance with the product specifications.

3. SMS Third Party Device warranties are transferred from the manufacturer to the contractor, which may then transfer third party warranties to the owner. Specific third party warranty details, terms and conditions, remedies and procedures, are either expressly stated on, or packaged with, or accompany such products. The warranty period may vary from product to product. These products include but are not limited to devices that are directly interconnected to the SMS field hardware or computers and are purchased directly from the SMS manufacturer.

B. Contractor Installation Warranty 1. Contractor shall warrant all equipment of this specification and associated installation labor

for a period of one (1) year from date of beneficial use. C. Critical Response Time

1. Contractor shall provide 24 hour, 7-day per week warranty coverage for critical equipment failures. Contractor shall respond in 4 hours or less.

1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two

years. B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program

software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.


SECTION 28 33 00



1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Credential card blanks, ready for printing. Include 500 credential cards for all personnel to

be enrolled at the site. Also include 500 clear card holders with neck lanyard. 2. Card Reader – five (5) additional. 3. Door Contacts – two (2) recessed and two (2) surface. 4. Request-to-exits – five (5) additional.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following (system specified in parenthesis): 1. Integrated Security Management System (Access Control and Video Surveillance)

a. Avigilon – No substitutions allowed (system to be an extension of the existing Enterprise Class Control Center Server and Access Control Manager)

2. Access Control and Intrusion Detection a. Access Control

1) Software a) Access Control Manager

2) Controllers a) All Access Control hardware shall be Mercury Security, Inc.

compatible b) Mercury Access Platform EP1502 c) MR52 2 door interface module d) MR16in 16 point input module e) MR16out 16 point output module

3) Door Hardware power supplies a) Altronix b) Life Safety Power

4) Card Readers a) HID 125 kHz contactless card reader: 5359CK100 HID Thin Line II

readers b) HID 125 kHz contactless mullion and frame mount card reader: 6005

HID ProxPoint Plus readers c) Contactless card blanks - HID ProxCard® II Card contactless cards

b. Intrusion Detection 1) Software

a) Access Control 2) Devices

a) ADEMCO Group b) Bosch c) GE

c. Push Button Switches 1) Securitron; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.

3. Video Surveillance Cameras a. Avigilon

4. Dedicated Intercommunications


SECTION 28 33 00



a. Avigilon 5. Access Control Cabling

a. West Penn b. Belden c. Commscope d. Windy City Wire

2.2 GENERAL A. The existing Security Management System is implemented through network appliance

architecture with a three-tiered modular hardware hierarchy and embedded three-tier software architecture.

B. The existing SMS integrates, within a browser interface, access control, alarm monitoring, video monitoring, and temperature monitoring applications. These applications are embedded in a three-tier software architecture. All doors connected shall be capable of being controlled remotely via browser interface.

C. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured, and regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.

D. All components shall be compatible with existing SMS system. E. All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. F. All components shall be provided with an explicit manufacturer warranty of one year for

software and two years for hardware.

2.3 OVERALL SYSTEM CAPABILITY A. The extension of the Security Management System shall meet the requirements of business

and government access control systems. The system extension shall monitor and control facility access, and shall perform alarm monitoring, camera and video monitoring, communications loss monitoring, and temperature monitoring. The system extension shall also have access to a database of system activity, personnel access control information, and system user passwords and user role permissions. The system extension shall be controlled from a web browser and require no software installation or client licenses. The system extension shall provide control and access to users on Local Area Networks (LAN), Wide Area Networks (WAN), wireless networks, and the Internet. The system extension shall provide email and/or text message alerts for all alarm conditions and threats.

B. Widget Desktop: The extension of the SMS shall provide a widget-based user interface that enables users to create custom monitoring layouts by selecting and arranging widgets on a desktop.

C. System Partitioning: The system administrator shall have the ability to divide the system extension into partitions, allowing subsets of the overall population and/or resources to be managed separately.

D. The system extension shall maintain the following Access Control capabilities of the existing system: 1. Login throttling, which can be enabled for the system to limit the number of login attempts

from the same IP address in a given period of time. 2. Integrated photo ID creation capability with video verification. 3. User interface secured access under encrypted password control. 4. System-wide timed anti-passback function. 5. Regional anti-passback with mustering and roll call functions. 6. Region occupancy counting and control. 7. “First-in-unlock” rule enforcement. 8. Multiple access levels and cards per person. 9. 128-bit card support for Wiegand card readers. 10. Detailed time specifications. 11. Simultaneous support for multiple card data formats. 12. Elevator control.


SECTION 28 33 00



13. Access privileges variable by threat level. 14. Scheduled portal unlock by time and threat level. 15. Card format decoder quickly discovers unknown card formats. 16. Card enrollment by reader or keyboard. 17. Compatibility with various input devices, including biometric readers. 18. Activation/expiration date/time by person with one minute resolution. 19. Access level disable for immediate lockdown. 20. Use of Threat Levels to alter security system behavior globally. 21. Duress PINs, which can be enabled for the system to allow a valid user to raise an alarm if

compelled under duress to use his or her credentials (card and PIN) to allow access for another person.

22. Multiple holiday schedules. Coordinate with Owner for final programming of schedules. 23. Timed unlock schedules. Coordinate with Owner for final programming of schedules. 24. Scheduled actions for arming inputs, activating outputs, and locking and unlocking portals. 25. Optional two-man access restriction for portals, requiring two valid card reads from two

separate cardholders for portal entry. 26. Card enrollment reader support. 27. Dual-reader portal support. 28. Wiegand Reader support. 29. Magnetic-stripe reader support with cards using ABA Track 2 format for up to 200 bits. 30. Wiegand keypad PIN support for 4-digit or 6-digit PINs. 31. 8-bit and 4-bit burst keypad support for 4-digit or 6-digit PINs. 32. Integration with supported alarm panels. 33. DMP intrusion panel high-level TCP/IP integration. 34. Optional storage and recall of ID photos and personal/emergency data. 35. Unlimited number of scheduled actions, with the controller downloading up to of 16 per

node per day of the soonest-to-activate actions applying to that node, and any others remaining in the database as candidates for downloading later. Expired scheduled actions are removed automatically.

36. The system shall support tracing a person’s activity in the current partition if the “Trace this person” check box is selected on the person record.

E. The system extension shall provide the following Monitoring capabilities: 1. The Home page lets users view a full system summary, including the Activity Log, Auto-

Monitor, and links to frequent User Tasks. 2. Common alarm panel integration for disarm on access, and arm on egress. 3. Support for the direct viewing of IP cameras. 4. Integrated real-time IP-based DVR and NVR systems with stored video replay for events. 5. Provides alarms on video loss, video motion detection, and video restore events. 6. Virtual inputs for video loss and building-occupancy-limits-exceeded. 7. Provides alarms on communication loss and temperature variation. 8. Support for the creation of custom sets of alarm event actions. 9. Provides the ability to record video and link to video for alarm events. 10. Available video control and playback through the SMS user interface. 11. Provides the ability to assign threat levels to various alarms according to severity. 12. Provides the ability to select up to 20 levels of priority for event actions. 13. Provides the ability to enter a duty log comment into the Activity Log, or to append a unique

or preset comment to a particular log entry while viewing the Activity Log. 14. Support for the display of Activity Log entries that include both the time the event occurred

on the node and the time it was reported to the controller. 15. Support for electronic supervision of alarm inputs. 16. Support for the use of output relays for enabling circuits under alarm event control. 17. A monitoring desktop that integrates video, system activity logs, floor plans, ID photos, and

alarm notifications.


SECTION 28 33 00



18. Support for the creation of unlimited customized monitoring layouts through the use of widgets, including layouts sized for the iPad or MacBook Air.

19. Graphic floor plans with active icons of security system resources. 20. System user permissions to grant whole or partial access to system resources, commands,

and personal data. 21. Secure access to the user interface under encrypted password control. 22. Delivery of alerts via browsers, email, and text messages.

F. The extension of the SMS shall provide the following Video Management capabilities: 1. Real-time video monitoring displays, including unlimited cameras simultaneously. 2. Playback of event-related video. 3. Video switching and video widget pop-ups based on access activity or event activation. 4. Integrated alarm inputs from the video management system. 5. Digital playback of video events. 6. Linking of video and events based on triggers provided by the SMS or video system. 7. Multiple pre-programmed supported cameras. 8. Recall of photo ID and real-time image for comparison. 9. Monitoring and control through a web browser interface. 10. System user permissions to grant whole or partial access to system cameras and video

resources. G. The extension of the SMS shall provide the following Security Database capabilities:

1. Maintain data of system activity, personnel access control information, system user passwords and custom user role permissions for whole or partial access to system resources and data.

2. Partitions: It shall be possible to partition the system to create independent, virtual security management systems for multiple populations.

3. Support for the sharing of access levels and user privileges across partitions in a system. 4. Built-in Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database for personal data. 5. LDAP integration for single-user logon authentication. 6. Unlimited person records. 7. Network-secure API for external application integration. 8. Extensive and easy to use custom report generator. 9. User-defined data fields in personnel records. 10. Record recall by vehicle tag, name, or card. 11. ODBC compliant Database. 12. An API for adding to, deleting from, and modifying the database. 13. Storage of system user passwords and permissions. 14. Storage and recall of ID photos and emergency personal information. 15. Pre-defined reports on system configuration, system activity history, and people. 16. An Audit Trail report that shows changes made to the security database over a specified

period of time. a. For each transaction listed in the report results, information is available on when

the transaction occurred, who made the changes, the fields that were modified, and the original and new values.

b. Search criteria can be applied to filter the report results, either by the person whose record was changed or by the area of the system configuration that was modified.

17. A Credential Audit report that shows all existing access cards by their current status settings. The report also shows for each card the name of the person to whom it was issued and the card number.

18. A Duty Log report shows duty log comments residing in the current security database, including archives.

a. For each duty log comment included in the report results, information is available on when the comment was entered, who entered it, the date and time of the


SECTION 28 33 00



logged event associated with the comment, the name of the logged event, and the specific comment text.

b. Search criteria can be applied to filter the report results, either by Operator (the user who entered the duty log comment) or by Event type.

19. English-based query language for instant custom reports. 20. Custom report writer interface that allows the interactive creation of custom reports.

Reports may be saved for later reuse. No third party software (such as Crystal Reports) shall be necessary.

21. Periodic backup to on-board flash ROM and optional network attached storage (NAS), including FTP servers.

22. Periodic archive creation for historical custom reporting and improved on-board database performance.

23. Email and text messaging (SMS) alert notifications.

2.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A. Card Reader General Requirements

1. Power: a. Card reader shall be powered from its associated Controller, including its standby

power source. 2. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semiflush, mullion, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types

shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: a. Indoors, controlled environment. b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. c. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the

operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site. 3. Display: LED or other type of visual indicator display shall provide visual and audible status

indications and user prompts. Indicate power on/off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked.

4. Touch Plate and Proximity Readers: a. Active detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible

credential cards through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique identification code number transmitted from the credential card.

b. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from contact with to at least 6 inches (150 mm) from the reader.

B. Card Readers – HID 125 kHz contactless card reader 1. 64-bit authentication with all RF data transmission between the card and reader encrypted. 2. Audio/visual indications include audio sounder with various tone sequences to signify

access granted, access denied, power up, and diagnostics. Visually impaired can easily distinguish between access granted and access denied. A high-intensity light bar provides visual status indication in red, green, or amber. Program green for access granted and red for access denied.

C. Units shall be black in color and suitable for indoor or outdoor environments.Contactless card blanks 1. 26-bit HID programmed, plain white in color front and back, ink jet sequential matching

internal/external numbering, vertical slot punch. D. General Controller Requirements

1. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the Central Station or workstation for controlling its operation.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements in this Article, manufacturers may use multipurpose Controllers.

3. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 90 minutes, complying with UL 924.

E. Mercury’s Access Platform EP1502


SECTION 28 33 00



1. Multi-operating system interface 2. Multi-host interface communications 3. Multi- card format support 4. Multi-reader technology support 5. AES 128 bit data encryption 6. HSPD-12/FIPS201 Compliant 7. UL 294 Recognized 8. Alarm keypad support 9. Function key support 10. Universal I/O device characterization

F. Mercury’s MR52 2-Door Interface 1. The MR52 will interface 2 card readers, 8 general purpose input monitor points and 6

control relays to a Mercury EP series intelligent controller 2. Provide enclosure suitable for mounting.

G. Mercury’s Access Platform MR16in 1. The MR16in is capable of supporting 16 general purpose input circuits which can be

individually set for normally-open or normally-closed operations and can be declared supervised and non-supervised.

2. Individually configurable parameters can be set for sensitivity ranges, timing parameters and end-of-line resistance values.

3. Two programmable relay outputs can be configured for fail safe or fail secure operation, supporting “On”, “Off”, “Pulse”, and “Repeating Pulse” commands.

H. Access Platform MR16out 1. The MR16out can be configured to control outboard devices for control purposes 2. Devices can be activated by the condition of selected system devices locally or regionally

without host intervention. 3. The MR16out provides individually configurable parameters to be set for timing and for fail-

safe vs. fail secure modes. 4. Relay operation may be initiated by direct operator commands, by time schedules, or by

event-based procedures. The relays support “On”, “Off”, “Pulse”, and “Repeating Pulse” commands. A pulse may range from .1 second to over 18 hours.

I. Door Hardware power supplies 1. Provide centralized electronic door hardware power supplies to provide power to all

electronic door hardware. Locate power supplies adjacent to door controllers. If existing electronic door hardware is to be re-used, replace the existing power supplies with new.

2. Power supply shall include a 120V input and (8) independent 12 VDC or 24 VDC fail-safe or fail-secure door hardware outputs. All doors shall be connected as fail-safe unless otherwise noted.

2.5 MERCURY HARDWARE INTEGRATION A. The SMS shall be modified as needed to support the integration of the addition of new access

control hardware from Mercury Security Corp as part of this Project.

2.6 REMOTE LOCKSET INTEGRATION A. The system extension shall support the integration of ASSA ABLOY Wi-Fi enabled locksets and

PoE locksets with the security management system. 1. The system shall support more than 500 remote locksets. 2. Once a lockset is installed and registered with the controller, it appears in the security

application as a “remote lockset” node, which can be enabled and configured to work with the controller.

3. When a remote lockset connects to the controller, it shall report its power type, which is encoded in its serial number.

4. It shall be possible to set configuration options for a remote lockset to change its call-in and unlock behaviors.


SECTION 28 33 00



5. It shall be possible to configure the reader and portal that were automatically created for a remote lockset.

6. It shall be possible to view cached information for a remote lockset, for troubleshooting purposes.

7. It shall be possible to specify special-use formats for access cards to be used with remote locksets.

8. The remote lockset shall be able to send high priority events to the controller. 9. It shall be possible to schedule an automatic unlock period for remote-lockset portals. The

start of this period can be triggered by time or by an initial valid card read. 10. It shall be possible to select a check box when creating a magnetic stripe ABA Track 2 card

format to ensure that the format will be recognized by remote locksets with magnetic stripe card readers.

11. It shall be possible to create remote lockset profiles to assist in the configuration and management of large numbers of remote locksets. A lockset profile is a defined set of attributes that affect lockset behaviors. Assigning a profile to a lockset gives it the attributes defined in the profile. Any subsequent changes made to the profile are applied to the lockset automatically.

12. Locksets shall support PIN-only credentials. 13. It shall be possible to specify a voltage level below which an offline lockset will go into

power saving mode. If a Low Battery event is enabled for the lockset, the event will be triggered. Once the battery is replaced, the lockset will leave power saving mode only when the voltage level reaches 1.5 volts higher than its current Low Voltage setting.

14. Online locksets shall have the same capabilities as offline locksets with the following additional capabilities:

a. Online locksets can be assigned to locations; changes to a location’s threat level can cause the locksets in that location to enter and exit panic mode.

b. Online locksets can be added and managed in floorplans. c. Online locksets can be unlocked momentarily via event actions or from the portal

status page, the Widget Desktop, the Monitoring Desktop, or a floorplan. d. Activity associated with an online lockset can be viewed in real time in the Activity

Log.

2.7 THIRD-PARTY SSL CERTIFICATE SUPPORT A. It shall be possible to configure an SSL certificate that will provide encryption alone, or

encryption plus authentication. The available options are: 1. Generating a self-signed SSL certificate, which is signed with the embedded web server’s

own private key. This certificate shall provide encryption but not authentication. 2. Generating an SSL certificate that is signed by a certificate authority (CA). This certificate

shall provide both encryption and authentication. 3. Uploading your own SSL certificate and matching key to the controller. Optionally, it shall

be possible to upload a chain, or intermediate, file that links the certificate to a trusted root certificate.

2.8 API INTEGRATION A. An application programming interface (API) is provided for the SMS. The API provides

programmatic access to the network-connected components managed by the SMS.

2.9 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment

housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened


SECTION 28 33 00



or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

2.10 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES A. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons, with stainless-steel

switch enclosures. 1. Electrical Ratings:

a. Minimum continuous current rating of 10 A at 120 V ac. 2. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting

in the switch enclosures. 3. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

a. Indoors, controlled environment. 4. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated Controller, using dc

control.

2.11 DOOR HARDWARE INTERFACE A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an alarm and annunciate a

local alarm. Exit device and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit devices and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

C. Electric Door Strikes: Use end-of-line resistors to provide power line supervision. Signal switches shall transmit data to Controller to indicate when the bolt is not engaged and the strike mechanism is unlocked, and shall report a forced entry. Power and signal shall be from the Controller. Electric strikes are specified in Division 08 "Door Hardware."

D. Power-Operated Doors: Card reader shall allow for power-operated door actuators to open power-operated doors. Remote control shall also be capable of allowing door actuators to open power-operated doors at scheduled times. Where existing card readers identified to be replaced with new allow use of power-operated doors, replacement card readers shall maintain this functionality. Where existing power-operated doors are present with new card readers to be installed at associated doors, existing power-operated doors shall be integrated with extension of the access control system for new card reader to allow for use of associated power-operated door actuator.

E. Fire Alarm Door Magnetic Hold Opens: Integrate existing hold opens with security management system as identified on Drawings.

2.12 RS-232 ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS A. ASCII interface shall allow RS-232 connections to be made between the control station

operating as the host PC and any equipment that will accept RS-232 ASCII command strings, such as CCTV switchers, intercoms, and paging systems. 1. Each alarm input in system shall allow for individual programming to output up to four

unique ASCII character strings through two different COM ports on the host PC. 2. Each input shall have the ability to be defined to transmit a unique ASCII string for alarm

and one for restore through one COM port, and a unique ASCII string for a nonalarm abnormal condition and one for a normal condition through the same or different COM port.

3. The predefined ASCII character strings shall have the ability to be up to 420 characters long with full use of all the ASCII control characters, such as return or line feed. The character strings shall be defined in database of system and then assigned to the appropriate inputs.

4. The COM ports of the host PC used to interface with external equipment shall be defined in the setup portion of the software. The COM port's baud rate, word length, stop bits, and parity shall be definable in the software to match that of the external equipment.

B. Alarm System Interface:


SECTION 28 33 00



1. RS-232 output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other monitoring and alarm systems to central-station automation software.

2. Alternatively, alarms that are received by this access control system are to be transferred to alarm automation system as if they were sent through a digital alarm receiver.

a. System shall be able to transmit an individual message from any alarm input to a burglar alarm automation monitoring system.

b. System shall be able to append to each message a predefined set of character strings as a prefix and suffix.

2.13 DOOR POSITIONSWITCHES/CONTACTS A. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral

overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum of three encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields.

B. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door and window frame. C. Overhead Door Switch: Balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor locations, and having door-

mounting magnet and floor-mounting switch unit.

2.14 DOOR VIDEO INTERCOM AND RELEASE SYSTEMS A. Control Software:

1. Software to be provided and installed onto PC (provided by others). 2. Software shall allow the user to modify the following items:

a. Call-in time out length b. Priority Levels c. Scan monitoring inclusion d. Door Release Activation e. Timing

3. Avigilon Control Center video management software B. Speaker-Microphone Station:

1. Aluminum, flush mount faceplate. Provide surface mount hardware as required. 2. Having privacy from remote monitoring without a warning tone signal at monitored station. 3. Communicating hands free, calling master station by actuating call switch. 4. Being free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode. 5. Fixed Color Camera w/ Lexan Lens cover. 6. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode. 7. RJ-45 connection. 8. Avigilon Model # 3.0C-H4VI-RO1-IR

2.15 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM DEVICES A. Bell: Central-station control unit 10 inches (254 mm) in diameter, rated to produce a minimum

sound output of 84 dB at 10 feet (3 m) from central-station control unit.

2.16 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Video Management System (VMS)

1. Software package shall include: a. Archiving support b. Media Router c. Audio d. Camera Sequences e. Time Zones f. Edge recording and trickling

B. Camera licenses 1. Provide camera licenses for the number of new cameras shown on plan drawings

C. Mobile Application


SECTION 28 33 00



1. Provide a Mobile Application license to allow two concurrent users of the mobile application. Include time during Owner Training to assist users on installation and configuration of the mobile application on their personal mobile devices. Enable mobile event recording on each device.

2.17 IP CAMERAS 1. See Drawings for Basis of Design cameras and associated mounting and enclosure

hardware. Coordinate final aiming of cameras during installation.

2.18 VIDEO MANAGEMENT INTEGRATION A. General: The extension of the SMS shall support the integration of new devices with the Digital

Video Recorders (DVR) supporting analog video cameras and Network Video Recorders (NVR). This integration shall allow the viewing of live streaming video in the browser interface and recorded video playback.

2.19 VIDEO AND CAMERA CONTROL A. Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a video surveillance source.

1. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate control buttons to represent Left, Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Scan, and a minimum of two custom command auxiliary controls.

2. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of cameras, with ability to import custom icons. Provide option for display of icons on graphic maps to represent their physical location.

3. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button that will display the camera associated with the alarm point.

B. Display mouse-selectable icons representing each camera source, to select source to be displayed. For sources that are connected to a video switcher, control station shall automatically send control commands through a COM port to display the requested camera when the camera icon is selected.

C. Allow cameras with preset positioning to be defined by displaying a different icon for each of the presets. Provide control with Next and Previous buttons to allow operator to cycle quickly through the preset positions.

2.20 TRANSFORMERS A. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control

system shall not be shared with any other system.

2.21 SMS System related components A. Access Control Cabling

1. Basis of Design: Windy City Cabling 4461030 2. Access Control composite cable, plenum rated with overall jacket, yellow in color. Cable

shall include the following: a. 22 AWG – 6 conductor (3 pair) card reader cable. b. 18 AWG – 4 conductor lock power cable. c. 22 AWG – 2 conductor door contact cable. d. 22 AWG – 4 conductor request-to-exit cable.

3. For doors that do not include a card reader, 22-AWG, 2-conductor cables in a plenum yellow jacket may be used to serve individual components such as door contacts.

B. Camera and Intercom Cabling – As called out in Division 27 Section “Communication Horizontal Cabling”.


SECTION 28 33 00



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL PRACTICE A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other

elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, Controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. The installation recommendations contained within ASIS, ANSI, EIA/TIA, and BICSI standards

are mandatory minimum standards and requirements. E. Coordinate hardware with telecom racks when mounting in equipment racks. Coordinate any

required rack space with the Owners’ IT staff. F. Provide shelves and mounting hardware as required for mounting equipment in racks. G. Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and level. H. Permanently installed equipment to be firmly and safely held in place. Design equipment

supports to support loads imposed with a safety factor of at least five. I. See Drawings for proposed routing of low-voltage cabling and recommended raceway

installation. Contractor shall verify final routing of low-voltage cabling and raceways on site prior to installation. Contractor may identify alternative routing paths on site capable of reducing impact to existing construction and maintaining or enhancing expected degree of quality of installation, without increasing cost to Owner. Alternative paths shall be reviewed with Architect or Engineer prior to installation.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01. B. Comply with EIA/TIA-606, "Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

of Commercial Buildings." C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop

custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval. 1. Record setup data for control station and workstations. 2. For each Location, record setup of Controller features and access requirements. 3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for

doors. Review existing schedules already programmed within security management system with Owner to establish new schedule times.

4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each Controller. 5. Assign action message names and compose messages. 6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video

surveillance features. 7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps. 8. Develop user-defined fields. 9. Develop screen layout formats. 10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control. 11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges. 12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification. 13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration. 14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test. 15. Develop cable and asset management system details; input data from construction

documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings. D. In meetings with Engineer and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust,

and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software.


SECTION 28 33 00



3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb. B. Install cameras with 84-inch- (2134-mm-) minimum clear space below cameras and their

mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance. C. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise

indicated. D. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect

unauthorized entry into system component enclosures, and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.

E. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting, testing, aiming, and adjusting of video surveillance and access control equipment and devices.

B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct video surveillance tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: 1. Prepare equipment list described in Part 1 "Submittals" Article. 2. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses. 3. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime

lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.

4. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet (17 to 23 m) away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place.

5. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 6. Set sensitivity of motion detection. 7. Connect and verify responses to alarms. 8. Verify operation of control-station equipment. 9. Coordinate with Owner for camera naming/labeling convention to be used to identify

cameras on video management software. D. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system

has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.

E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above. G. Record test results for each piece of equipment. H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified

requirements are met. 1. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not

limited to, measurements of power supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.


SECTION 28 33 00



2. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.

3.5 ACCESS CONTROL/INTRUSION DETECTION CONTROL A. Door position monitoring shall be on at all times, with manual override capable via keypad or

software override. B. System shall be capable of a scheduled unarmed time, as directed by Owner and schedule

software.

3.6 SECURITY SYSTEM RACK MOUNTED EQUIPMENT AND WORKSTATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of security equipment with Owner's telecommunications and

LAN equipment and service suppliers. 1. Meet with Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements

and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels

in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

C. Recorded agreements, equipment arrangement adjustments, and power coordination shall be provided with submittal information prior to approval by Architect/Engineer.

3.7 CABLING A. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 27 Section “Communication

Horizontal Cabling”. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks,

and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces. C. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. D. Boxes and enclosures containing security system components or cabling, and which are easily

accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered to be accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

E. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the Controller or panel location.

3.8 CABLE APPLICATION A. Comply with EIA/TIA-569, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces." B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if

recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware. C. RS-232 Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 feet (15 m). D. RS-485 Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 feet (1220 m). E. Card Readers and Keypads:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.

2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum distance from Controller to the reader is 250 feet (75 m), and install No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 feet (150 m).


SECTION 28 33 00



3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the Controller.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more.

F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from Controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 feet (75 m).

G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to Controller, with a maximum distance of 25 feet (8 m).

H. Cameras: UTP, as called out in Division 27 Section “Communication Horizontal Cabling”.

3.9 GROUNDING A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Power and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment." C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to

minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

3.10 INSTALLATION A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they

shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the Controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

B. Install card and fob readers.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA-606. B. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

C. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.12 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Develop, install, and test software and databases for the complete and proper operation of

systems involved. Assign software license to Owner. B. The Contractor is responsible for the entire programming and setup of the system such that no

additional programming is required. Programming shall include the setup of all available features of the software.

C. Perform a full system back-up at completion of initial programming and deliver the configuration to the Owner.

D. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to “fine tune” operating parameters and sequence of operations based on any revisions to the Owner’s operating requirements.

3.13 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in " Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.


SECTION 28 33 00



1. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and security personnel.

3.14 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions and to optimize performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and

adjust back-focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner'

utilization of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.15 COMMISSIONING A. System shall be completely commissioned by factory trained and authorized service personnel. B. Factory commissioning shall consist of two visits as follows:

1. Start Up of System: During this visit factory personnel shall confirm conduit wire requirements, and shall provide calibration for all installed card readers and intrusion devices, and integrated devices. Device calibration shall be provided for everything. This visit shall be coordinated with the project engineer for the project.

2. Commissioning Trip: This trip will consist of demonstrating to the Engineer of Record, the complete and functional security management system as defined in this Section.

C. Perform the following tests and adjustments in compliance with Recommended Practices for Measurements on Physical Security Systems. Correct any technical deficiencies until the preferred performance objectives are accomplished. 1. Video:

a. Adjust pan, tilt and lens per manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Adjust each camera for coverage and conditions in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instruction and in accordance with Owner Security staff coordination.

c. Document each camera testing with coordinated field of view. d. Document time and date that testing was performed. e. Perform a subjective evaluation of each cameras picture quality. Provide a system

with no visible components of interference, signal dropouts etc. f. Provide a screen shot of each camera in electronic form for review by the Engineer

and the Owners’ Security Management staff. g. Verify that all frame rates have been coordinated per camera and per camera

stream. h. Verify that all resolution settings have been coordinated with frame rates for all

streams. i. Test any motion zones that have been coordinated with the operators. j. Verity that all modesty settings and blackouts have been coordinated. k. Verify that all presets have been adjusted and programmed relating to the cameras

and door recalls. l. Verify that all contrast settings have been made. m. Verify that all day/night settings have been made per location. n. Verify that all automatic shutter features and iris settings have been set per

camera location. o. Measure and record any spurious signals. p. Verify that all fiber cabling and transceivers have been tested and are operational. q. Verify that all viewing angles have been set and are unobstructed.


SECTION 28 33 00



r. Verify that all environmental housings have been connected and are functioning as recommended by the manufacturer.

s. Verify that all lenses are clean and free of debris. t. Verify that all housing protection globes and housings are clean and free of debris.

2. Software: a. Verify that all software has been debugged and screens (GUI) are installed as

approved and agreed, and that all functions are operational. b. Verify that all client licenses have been provided for the all SMS systems.

3. Access Control: a. Verify that all power supplies are connected and power loss detection is

operational. b. Verify that all device and cable resistance readings have been taken and

documented and meet manufacturer’s specifications. c. Verify all door contacts, REX and card reader devices are operating properly and

as intended by agreed programming. d. Verify that all schedules have been set and programmed as agreed upon with

building operator. e. Verify that all gates are connected and tested for operation. f. Verify that video intercom has been integrated to open location remotely. g. Verify that all GUI features, maps and icons are working as agreed upon during the

GUI discussions. 4. Video Intercom:

a. Verify that all intercom stations are working and programmed in accordance with manufacturers and operators directions.

b. Verify that all intercom stations are interconnected with access control for remote opening via SMS.

c. Verify that all intercom stations with additional call in buttons are functioning correctly.

5. Documentation: a. Verify that all electrical breakers are documented and that they are assigned

correctly to the intended equipment. b. Verify that these breakers and panel numbers are included in the final

documentation. c. Verify that all cables are labeled and documented on final drawings. This will

include both permanent cabling and prefabricated cables. It is the intent that every cable in the Physical Security System be numerically labeled.

d. Verify that all as-built documentation is updated and available. D. Provide all required test equipment for commissioning and troubleshooting.

3.16 CLEANING A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.17 TECHNICAL SUPPORT, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE: A. A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to

suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion provide unlimited Technical Support,

Service and Maintenance on an on call basis. 2. Within the subsequent 12 months provide limited Technical Support, Service and

Maintenance including one annual system review, reset, service and adjustment and a maximum of three service calls.

a. Additional service calls to be made at fixed hourly rates and trip charges. 3. Service Calls: Service call shall be made during normal school working hours from 8:00 am

through 3:30 pm week days with twenty four (24) hours of notice and request by the Owner.


SECTION 28 33 00



4. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Assist Owner in making programming and scheduling changes and adjustments. b. Check cable connections. c. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. d. Recommend changes to card readers, intrusion devices, and associated

equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system. e. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.18 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain video surveillance system. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Provide the Owner and their representative’s hands-on instruction on the use and maintenance of the systems in (2) 4 hour sessions. The Integrator shall videotape all of the training sessions:

C. In addition to the above hour requirements, the division 28 contractor shall include 16 additional hours of training to be used during the (1) year warranty period. These additional hours can be used at the Owners discretion for any or all of the systems included.

D. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner and the Commissioning Professional. Provide competent, factory-authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Owner and the Commissioning Professional after submission and approval of formal training agendas. Refer to 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements for details associated with equipment training.



SECTION 28 33 00





SECTION 28 33 00


